SlideShare a Scribd company logo
1. Chñ ng ÷ (subject). 7
1.1 Danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc v” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc.
1.2 Qužn tÔ a (an) v” the
1.3 Cžch sö dÎng Other v” another.
1.4 Cžch sö dÎng litter/ a litter, few/ a few
1.5 Së h ÷u cžch
1.6 Some, any
2. §éng tÔ ( verb)
2.1 HiÖn tÂči (present)
2.1.1 HiÖntÂči Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n (simple present)
2.1.2 HiÖn tÂči tiÕp diÔn (present progressive)
2.1.3 Present perfect ( hiÖn tÂči ho”n th”nh)
2.1.4 HiÖn tÂči ho”n th”nh tiÕp diÔn ( preset perfect
progressive)
2.2 Quž khÞ ( Past)
2.2.1 Quž khÞ Ÿ  n gi¶n (simple past)
2.2.2 Qu¾ khþ tiÕp diÔn (Past progresive).
2.2.3 Quž khÞ ho”n th”nh (past perfect).
2.2.4 Quž khĂž ho”n th”nh tiÕp diÔn (past perfect
progressive).
2.3 TÂŹ ng lai
2.3.1 T ng lai Ÿ  n gi¶n (simple future)
2.3.2 T¬ ng lai tiÕp diÔn ( future progressive)
2.3.3 T ng lai ho”n th”nh (future perfect)
3. SĂč ho” hĂźp gi Ă·a chñ ng Ă· v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ”.
3.1 Chñ ng ÷ ŸÞng tžch khåi Ÿ éng tÔ.
3.2 Cžc danh tĂ” lu«n ¼ßi hĂĄi Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” Âź Âči tĂ” sĂš it.
3.3 Cžch sö dÎng none, no
3.4 Cžch sö dĂŽng cÊu trĂłc either ... or v” neither ... nor.
3.5 Cžc danh tĂ” tËp thÓ
3.6 Cžch sö dÎng A number of/ the number of
3.7 Cžc danh tĂ” lu«n dĂŻng Ă« sĂš nhiÒu.
3.8 Cžch dïng cžc th”nh ng ÷ There is, there are
4. §Âči tĂ”
4.1 §Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng chñ ng Ă· (Subject pronoun)
4.2 §Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng t ©n ng Ă·
4.3 TÝnh tĂ” sĂ« h Ă·u
4.4 §Âči tĂ” sĂ« h Ă·u
4.5 §Âči tĂ” ph¶n th ©n (reflexive pronoun)
5. §éng tÔ dïng l”m t ©n ng ÷
5.1 §éng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ l”m t ©n ng Ă·
5.2 Ving dïng l”m t ©n ng ÷
5.3 3 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼Æc biÖt
5.4 Cžc Ÿ éng tÔ ŸÞng Ÿ»ng sau giíi tÔ
5.5 VÊn ¼Ò Âź Âči tĂ” Âźi trĂ­c Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ hoÆc Ving
l”m t ©n ng ÷.
6. Cžch sö dĂŽng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” bžn khiÕm khuyÕt need v” dare
6.1 need
6.2 Dare
7. Cžch dïng Ÿ éng tÔ to be + infinitive
8. C©u håi
8.1 C©u håi yes v” no
8.2 C©u håi th«ng bžo
8.2.1 who v” what l”m chñ ng ÷.
8.2.2 Whom v” what l” t ©n ng ÷ cña c©u håi
8.2.3 C©u håi d”nh cho cžc bÊ ng ÷ (when, where, why,
how)
8.3 C©u hĂĄi gižn tiÕp (embedded questions)
8.4 C©u håi c㠟 u«i
9. LĂši nĂŁi phĂŽ hoÂč khÂŒng ¼Þnh v” phñ ¼Þnh.
9.1 LĂši nĂŁi phĂŽ hoÂč khÂŒng ¼Þnh.
9.2 LĂši nĂŁi phĂŽ hoÂč phñ ¼Þnh
10. C©u phñ ¼Þnh
11. MÖnh lÖnh thþc
11.1 MÖnh lÖnh thĂžc trĂčc tiÕp.
11.2 MÖnh lÖnh thþc gi¾n tiÕp.
12. §éng tĂ” khiÕm khuyÕt.
12.1 DiÔn Âź Âčt thĂȘi tÂŹ ng lai.
12.2 DiÔn Âź Âčt c ©u Âź iÒu kiÖn.
12.2.1 §iÒu kiÖn cĂŁ thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči.
12.2.2 §iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči.
12.2.3 §iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi quž khĂž.
12.2.4 Cžc cžch dĂŻng ¼Æc biÖt cña Will, would v” sould trong
c¾c mÖnh ¼Ò if
13. Cžch sö dÎng th”nh ng ÷ as if, as though.
13.1 ThĂȘi hiÖn tÂči.
13.2 ThĂȘi quž khĂž.
14. Cžch sö dÎng Ÿ éng tÔ To hope v” to wish.
14.1 ThĂȘi tÂŹ ng lai.
14.2 ThĂȘi hiÖn tÂči
14.3 ThĂȘi quž khĂž.
15. Cžch sö dÎng th”nh ng ÷ used to v” get/be used to
15.1 used to.
15.2 get / be used to.
16. Cžch sö dÎng th”nh ng ÷ Would rather
16.1 LoÂči c©u cĂŁ mĂ©t chñ ng Ă·.
16.2 LoÂči c©u cĂŁ 2 chñ ng Ă·
17. Cžch sö dÎng Would Like
18. Cžch sö dĂŽng cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khiÕm khuyÕt ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt
cžc trÂčng thži Ă« hiÖn tÂči.
18.1 Could/may/might.
18.2 Should
18.3 Must
19. Cžch sö dĂŽng cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khiÕm khuyÕt ¼Ó diÕn Âź Âčt
cžc trÂčng thži Ă« thĂȘi quž khĂž.
20. tÝnh tĂ” v” phĂŁ tĂ” (adjective and adverb).
21. §éng tÔ nÚi.
22. So sžnh cña tÝnh tĂ” v” danh tĂ”
22.1 So sžnh b»ng.
22.2 So sžnh h n, kÐm
22.3 So sžnh hĂźp lĂœ
22.4 Cžc dÂčng so sžnh ¼Æc biÖt
22.5 So sžnh Ÿ a bé
22.6 So sžnh kÐp (c”ng ....th × c”ng)
22.7 No sooner ... than (vĂ”a mĂ­i ... th ×; chÂŒng bao l ©u ...
th ×)
23. DÂčng nguyÂȘn, so sžnh h ÂŹn v” so sžnh h ÂŹn nhÊt.
24. Cžc danh tĂ” l”m chĂžc nšng tÝnh tĂ”
25. Enough vĂ­i tÝnh tĂ”, phĂŁ tĂ” v” danh tĂ”
26. Cžc tĂ” nĂši chØ nguyÂȘn nh ©n
26.1 Because/ because of
26.2 MĂŽc ¼Ých v” kÕt qu¶ (so that- ¼Ó)
26.3 Cause and effect
27. MĂ©t sĂš tĂ” nĂši mang tÝnh Âź iÒu kiÖn
28. C©u bÞ Âź Ă©ng
29. §éng tĂ” g ©y nguyÂȘn nh ©n
29.1 Have/ get / make
29.2 Let
29.3 Help
30. Ba Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼Æc biÖt
31. CÊu trĂłc phĂžc hĂźp v” Âź Âči tĂ” quan hÖ thay thÕ
31.1 That v” Which l”m chñ ng ÷ cña c ©u phÎ
31.2 That v” wich l”m t ©n ng ÷ cña c ©u phÎ
31.3 Who l”m chñ ng ÷ cña c©u phÎ
31.4 Whom l”m t ©n ng ÷ cña c©u phÎ
31.5 MÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ bŸt buĂ©c v” mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ kh«ng bŸt
buéc
31.6 TÇm quan trĂ€ng cña dÊu phÈy trong mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ
31.7 Cžch sö dÎng All / both/ several / most ... + of + whom
/ which
31.8 What v” whose
32. Cžch loÂči bĂĄ cžc mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ
33. Cžch sö dĂŽng ph ©n tĂ” 1 trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp ¼Æc
biÖt
34. Cžch sö dĂŽng nguyÂȘn mÉu ho”n th”nh
35. Nh ÷ng cžch sö dÎng khžc cña that
35.1 That vĂ­i t cžch cña mĂ©t liÂȘn tĂ” (r»ng)
35.2 MÖnh ¼Ò cã that
36. C©u gi¶ ¼Þnh
36.1 C©u gi¶ ¼Þnh dĂŻng would rather that
36.2 C©u gi¶ ¼Þnh dĂŻng vĂ­i Âź Ă©ng tĂ” trong b¶ng.
36.3 C©u gi¶ ¼Þnh dĂŻng vĂ­i tÝnh tĂ”
36.4 DĂŻng vĂ­i mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp khžc
36.5 C©u gi¶ ¼Þnh dĂŻng vĂ­i it is time
37. LÚi nãi bao h”m
37.1 Not only ... but also (kh«ng nh Ă·ng ... m” cßn)
37.2 As well as (cĂČng nh, cĂČng nh l”)
37.3 Both ... and ( c¶ ... lÉn )
38. Cžch sö dÎng to know v” to know how
39. MÖnh ¼Ò nhĂźng bĂ©
39.1 Despite / in spite of (mÆc dï)
39.2 although, even though, though
40. Nh Ă·ng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” dÔ g ©y nhÇm lÉn
41. MĂ©t sĂš Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼Æc biÖt khžc.
PhÇn IIPhÇn II
TiÕng Anh viÕtTiÕng Anh viÕt
I. Cžc lçi thĂȘng gÆp trong tiÕng anh viÕt
42. SĂč ho” hĂźp cña thĂȘi Âź Ă©ng tĂ”
43. Cžch sö dÎng to say, to tell
44. TĂ” Âźi trĂ­c ¼Ó giĂ­i thiÖu
45. §Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng one v” you
46. Cžch sö dĂŽng ph ©n tĂ” mĂ« ¼Çu cho mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ
46.1 V+ing mĂ« ¼Çu mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ
46.2 Ph©n tĂ” 2 mĂ« ¼Çu mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ ¼Ó chØ bÞ Âź Ă©ng
46.3 §éng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ chØ mĂŽc ¼Ých mĂ« ¼Çu cho
mÖnh ¼Ò phî
46.4 Ng Ă· danh tĂ” hoÆc ng Ă· giĂ­i tĂ” mĂ« ¼Çu mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ
chØ sĂč tÂŹ ng Ăžng
47. Ph©n tĂ” dĂŻng l”m tÝnh tĂ”
47.1 DĂŻng ph ©n tĂ” 1 l”m tÝnh tĂ”
47.2 DĂŻng ph ©n tĂ” 2 l”m tÝnh tĂ”
48. ThÔa (redundancy)
49. CÊu trĂłc c ©u song song
50. Th«ng tin trĂčc tiÕp v” th«ng tin gižn tiÕp
50.1 C©u trĂčc tiÕp v” c©u gižn tiÕp
50.2 PhÂŹ ng phžp chuyÓn Âź ĂŠi tĂ” c©u trĂčc tiÕp sang c©u
gi¾n tiÕp
50.3 §éng tĂ” vĂ­i t ©n ng Ă· trĂčc tiÕp v” t ©n ng Ă· gižn tiÕp
51. PhĂŁ tĂ” Âź ¶o lÂȘn ¼Çu c©u
52. Cžch chĂ€n nh Ă·ng c©u tr¶ lĂȘi Ÿóng
53. Nh Ă·ng tĂ” dÔ g ©y nhÇm lÉn
54. Cžch sö dÎng giíi tÔ
54.1 During - trong suÚt (h”nh Ÿ éng x¶y ra trong mét
qu·ng thĂȘi gian)
54.2 From (tĂ”) > < to ( ¼Õn)
54.3 Out of (ra khåi) > < into (di v”o)
54.4 by
54.5 In (Ă« trong, Ă« tÂči) - nghÜa xžc ¼Þnh h ÂŹn at
54.6 on
54.7 at - Ă« tÂči (thĂȘng l” bÂȘn ngo”i, kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh b»ng in)
55. Ng Ă· Âź Ă©ng tĂ”
56. SĂč kÕt hĂźp cña cžc danh tĂ”, Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” tÝnh tĂ” vĂ­i cžc
giĂ­i tĂ”
GRAMMAR REVIEW
CÊu trĂłc c© u tiÕn g An h
Subject + Verb as predicate + Complement + Modifier.
Chñ ng Ă· §éng tĂ” vÞ ng Ă· t ©n ng Ă· bĂŠ ng Ă·
1. Chñ n g ÷ (su bject)
‱ §Þng ¼Çu c ©u l”m chñ ng Ă· v” quyÕt ¼Þnh viÖc chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ”.
‱ Chñ ng Ă· cĂŁ thÓ l” 1 cĂŽm tĂ”, 1 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ (cĂŁ to), 1 V+ing, song
nhiÒu nhÊt vÉn l” 1 danh tĂ” v × 1 danh tĂ” cĂŁ liÂȘn quan tĂ­i nh Ă·ng vÊn ¼Ò sau:
1. 1 Dan h t Ă” Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc v ” k h«n g Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc.
- Danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng vĂ­i sĂš ¼Õm do Âź ĂŁ cĂŁ h ×nh thži sĂš Ýt, sĂš
nhiÒu. NĂŁ cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng vĂ­i a (an) v” the.
- Danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc kh«ng dĂŻng Âź Ăźc vĂ­i sĂš ¼Õm do Âź ĂŁ nĂŁ kh«ng cĂŁ h ×nh
thži sĂš nhiÒu. Do Âź ĂŁ, nĂŁ kh«ng dĂŻng Âź Ăźc vĂ­i a (an).
- MĂ©t sĂš cžc danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc cĂŁ h ×nh thži sĂš nhiÒu ¼Æc biÖt vÝ dĂŽ:
person - people woman –
women
mouse - mice foot –
feet
tooth - teeth man -
men.
-Sau Âź © y l” mĂ©t sĂš danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc m” ta cÇn biÕt.
Sand soap physics mathematic
s
News mumps Air politics
measles information Meat homework
food economics advertising
*
Money
* MÆc dĂŻ advertising l” danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc, nhng advertisement lÂči l” danh
tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc.
VÝ dî:
There are too many advertisements during television shows.
There is too much advertising during television shows.
- MĂ©t sĂš danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc nh food, meat, money, sand, water, Âź «i lĂłc Âź -
Ăźc dĂŻng nh cžc danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc ¼Ó chØ cžc dÂčng khžc nhau cña loÂči danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ.
VÝ dî:
This is one of the foods that my doctor has forbidden me to eat.
(chØ ra mĂ©t loÂči thĂžc šn ¼Æc biÖt n”o Âź ĂŁ)
He studies meats
( chÂŒng hÂčn pork, beef, lamb. vv...)
B¶n g s a u l” cžc Âź Þ n h n g Ă· dĂŻn g Âź Ăźc vĂ­i dan h t Ă” Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc v ” k h«n g Âź Õ m
Âź Ăźc.
Danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc (with count
noun)
Danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc (with non-count
noun)
a (an), the, some, any
this, that, these, those,
none,one,two,three,...
many
a lot of
plenty of
a large number of
a great number of, a great many
of.
(a) few
few ... than
more ... than
the, some, any
this, that
non
much (thĂȘng dĂŻng trong c ©u phñ ¼Þnh hoÆc
c ©u håi
a lot of
a large amount of
a great deal of
(a) little
less ... than
more ... than
- Danh tĂ” time nÕu dĂŻng vĂ­i nghÜa thĂȘi gian l” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc nhng nÕu dĂŻng vĂ­i
nghÜa sĂš lÇn hoÆc thĂȘi Âź Âči lÂči l” danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc.
VÝ dî:
We have spent too much time on this homework.
She has been late for class six times this semester.
1. 2 Q užn t Ô a (an) v ” t h e
1- a v Μ a n
an - Âź Ăźc dĂŻn g:
- trĂ­c 1 danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt ¼Õm Âź Ăźc bŸt ¼Çu b»ng 4 nguyÂȘn © m (vowel) a, e, i,
o
- hai bžn nguyÂȘn © m u, y
- cžc danh tĂ” bŸt ¼Çu b»ng h c © m.
vÝ dî: u : an uncle.
h : an hour
- hoÆc trĂ­c cžc danh tĂ” viÕt tŸt Âź Ăźc Âź Ă€c nh 1 nguyÂȘn © m.
VÝ dî: an L-plate, an SOS, an MP
a : Âź Ăźc dĂŻn g:
- trĂ­c 1 danh tĂ” bŸt ¼Çu b»ng phĂŽ © m (consonant).
- dĂŻng trĂ­c mĂ©t danh tĂ” bŸt ¼Çu b»ng uni.
a university, a uniform, a universal, a union.
- trĂ­c 1 danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt ¼Õm Âź Ăźc, trĂ­c 1 danh tĂ” kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ vÒ
mÆt ¼Æc Âź iÓm, tÝnh chÊt, vÞ trÝ hoÆc Âź Ăźc nhŸc ¼Õn lÇn ¼Çu trong
c ©u.
- Âź Ăźc dĂŻng trong cžc th”nh ng Ă· chØ sĂš lĂźng nhÊt ¼Þnh.
VÝ dî : a lot of, a couple, a dozen, a great many, a great deal of.
- dĂŻng trĂ­c nh Ă·ng sĂš ¼Õm nhÊt ¼Þnh, ¼Æc biÖt l” chØ h”ng tršm, h”ng
ng”n.
VÝ dî: a hundred, a thousand.
- trĂ­c half khi nĂŁ theo sau 1 Âź ÂŹ n vÞ nguyÂȘn vÑn.
VÝ dĂŽ: a kilo and a half v” cĂČng cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ă€c l” one and a half kilos.
Ch Ăł Ăœ : 1 /2 kg = half a kilo ( kh«ng cĂŁ a trĂ­c half).
- dĂŻng trĂ­c half khi nĂŁ Âź i vĂ­i 1 danh tĂ” khžc tÂčo th”nh tĂ” ghÐp.
VÝ dĂŽ : a half-holiday nöa kĂș nghØ, a half-share : nöa cĂŠ phÇn.
- dïng tríc cžc tû sÚ nh 1/3, 1 /4, 1/5, = a third, a quarter, a fifth hay one
third, one fourth, one fifth .
- DĂŻng trong cžc th”nh ng Ă· chØ giž c¶, tĂšc Âź Ă©, tĂ» lÖ.
VÝ dî: five dolars a kilo; four times a day.
- DĂŻng trong cžc th”nh ng Ă· tr Ă­c cžc danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt ¼Õm Âź Ăźc, dĂŻng trong c ©u
c¶m thžn.
VÝ dî: Such a long queue! What a pretty girl!
Nhng: such long queues! What pretty girls.
- a cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc ¼Æt trĂ­c Mr/Mrs/Miss + tÂȘn hĂ€ (surname):
VÝ dî: a Mr Smith, a Mrs Smith, a Miss Smith.
a Mr Smith nghÜa l” ‘ ngĂȘi Âź ”n «ng Âź Ăźc gĂ€i l” Smith’ v” ngĂŽ Ăœ l” «ng ta
l” ngĂȘi lÂč Âź Ăši vĂ­i ngĂȘi nĂŁi. Cßn nÕu kh«ng cĂŁ a tĂžc l” ngĂȘi nĂŁi biÕt «ng
Smith.
2- The
- §ßc sö dĂŽng khi danh tĂ” Âź Ăźc xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ vÒ tÝnh chÊt, ¼Æc Âź iÓm, vÞ trÝ
hoÆc Âź Ăźc nhŸc ¼Õn lÇn thĂž 2 trong c ©u.
- Th e + n o u n + pr e p o sition + n o u n.
VÝ dî : the girl in blue; the man with a banner; the gulf of Mexico; the United
States of America.
- Th e + dan h t Ă” + Âź Âč i t Ă” q u an h Ö + m Ö n h Âź Ò p h ĂŽ
VÝ dî: the boy whom I met; the place where I met him.
- TrĂ­c 1 danh tĂ” ngĂŽ Ăœ chØ mĂ©t vËt riÂȘng biÖt.
VÝ dî: She is in the garden.
- The + tÝnh tĂ” so sžnh bËc nhÊt hoÆc sĂš tĂ” thĂž tĂč hoÆc only way.
VÝ dî : The first week; the only way.
- The + dt sĂš Ýt tĂźng trng cho mĂ©t nhĂŁm thĂł vËt hoÆc Âź Ă„ vËt th × cĂŁ thÓ bĂĄ the
v” Âź ĂŠi danh tĂ” sang sĂš nhiÒu.
VÝ dî: The whale = Whales, the shark = sharks, the deep-freeze = deep -
freezes.
Nhng Âź Ăši vĂ­i danh tĂ” m a n (chØ lo”i ngĂȘi) th × kh«ng cĂŁ qužn tĂ” (a, the) ŸÞng
trĂ­c.
VÝ dî: if oil supplies run out, man may have to fall back on the horse.
- Th e + dan h t Ă” s Ăš Ýt chØ th”nh viÂȘn cña mĂ©t nhĂŁm ngĂȘi nhÊt ¼Þnh.
VÝ dî: the small shopkeeper is finding life increasingly difficult.
- Th e + adj Âź Âči diÖn cho 1 lĂ­p ngĂȘi, nĂŁ kh«ng cĂŁ h ×nh thži sĂš nhiÒu nhng Âź Ăźc coi
l” 1 danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau nĂŁ ph¶i Âź Ăźc chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu.
VÝ dĂŽ: the old = ngĂȘi gi” nĂŁi chung; The disabled = nh Ă·ng ngĂȘi t”n tËt; The
unemployed = nh Ă·ng ngĂȘi thÊt nghiÖp.
- DĂŻng trĂ­c tÂȘn cžc khu vĂčc, vĂŻng Âź · nĂŠi tiÕng vÒ mÆt ¼Þa lĂœ hoÆc lÞch sö.
VÝ dî: The Shahara. The Netherlands. The Atlantic.
- Th e + E a s t / We s t/ S o u t h/ Nor t h + n o u n.
VÝ dî: the East/ West end.
The North / South Pole.
Nhng kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng the trĂ­c cžc tĂ” chØ phÂŹ ng hĂ­ng n”y, nÕu nĂŁ Âź i kÌm vĂ­i tÂȘn
cña mĂ©t khu vĂčc ¼Þa lĂœ.
VÝ dî: South Africal, North Americal, West Germany.
- Th e + t ÂȘ n cžc Âź Ă„ hĂźp xĂ­n g, cžc d ” n n hÂčc c ĂŠ Âź i Ó n, cžc b a n n hÂčc p h ĂŠ
t h«n g .
VÝ dî: the Bach choir, the Philadenphia Orchestra, the Beatles.
- Th e + t ÂȘ n cžc t ĂȘ bžo lĂ­n/ cžc co n tÇ u bi Ó n/ k hin h k hÝ cÇu .
VÝ dî: The Titanic, the Time, the Great Britain.
- Th e + t ÂȘ n h Ă€ Ă« s Ăš n hi Ò u cĂŁ nghÜa l” gia Âź × nh hĂ€ nh” ...
VÝ dĂŽ: the Smiths = Mr and Mrs Smith (and their children) hay cßn gĂ€i l” gia
Âź × nh nh” Smith.
- Th e + TÂȘn Ă« s Ăš Ýt + c ĂŽ m t Ă”/ m Ö n h Âź Ò cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng ¼Ó ph ©n biÖt
ngĂȘi n”y vĂ­i ngĂȘi khžc cĂŻng tÂȘn.
VÝ dî: We have two Mr Smiths. Which do you want? I want the Mr Smith who
signed this letter.
- Kh«ng dïng the tríc 1 sÚ danh tÔ nh Home, church, bed, court, hospital, prison,
school, college, university khi nĂŁ Âź i vĂ­i Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” giĂ­i tĂ” chØ chuyÓn Âź Ă©ng
(chØ Âź i tĂ­i Âź ĂŁ l”m mĂŽc ¼Ých chÝnh).
VÝ dî: He is at home. I arrived home before dark. I sent him home.
to bed ( ¼Ó ngñ)
to church ( ¼Ó cÇu nguyÖn)
to court ( ¼Ó kiÖn tîng)
We go to hospital (ch Ă·a bÖnh)
to prison ( Âźi tĂŻ)
to school / college/ university ( ¼Ó hĂ€c)
TÂŹ ng tĂč
in bed
at church
We can be in court
in hospital
at school/ college/ university
We can be / get back (hoÆc be/ get home) from school/ college/university.
leave school
We can leave hospital
be released from prison.
VĂ­i mĂŽc ¼Ých khžc th × ph¶i dĂŻng the.
VÝ dî:
I went to the church to see the stained glass.
He goes to the prison sometimes to give lectures.
Student go to the university for a class party.
‱ Se a
Go to sea (thñy thñ Âź i biÓn)
to be at the sea (h”nh khžch/ thuĂ» thñ Âź i trÂȘn biÓn)
Go to the sea / be at the sea = to go to/ be at the seaside : Âź i tŸm biÓn, nghØ
m žt.
We can live by / near the sea.
‱ Work a n d office.
Work (n ÂŹi l”m viÖc) Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng kh«ng cĂŁ the Ă« trĂ­c.
Go to work.
nhng office lÂči ph¶i cĂŁ the.
Go to the office.
VÝ dî:
He is at / in the office.
NÕu to be in office (kh«ng cĂŁ the) nghÜa l” Âź ang gi Ă· chĂžc.
To be out of office - th«i gi ÷ chÞc.
‱ Town
The cĂŁ thÓ bĂĄ Âź i khi nĂŁi vÒ thÞ trÊn cña ngĂȘi nĂŁi hoÆc cña chñ thÓ.
VÝ dî:
We go to town sometimes to buy clothes.
We were in town last Monday.
Go to town / to be in town - VĂ­i mĂŽc ¼Ých chÝnh l” Âź i mua h”ng.
B¶n g dĂŻn g t h e v ” k h«n g dĂŻn g t h e tr o n g m Ă© t s Ăš tr ĂȘ n g hĂźp Âź Æ c bi Ö t.
Dïn g the Kh«ng dïn g th e
‱ TrĂ­c cžc Âź Âči dÂŹ ng, s«ng ngßi, biÓn,
vÞnh v” cžc hĂ„ Ă« sĂš nhiÒu.
VÝ dî:
The Red sea, the Atlantic Ocean,
the Persian Gulf, the Great Lackes.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc d·y nĂłi.
VÝ dî:
The Rockey Moutains.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn 1 vËt thÓ duy nhÊt trÂȘn thÕ
giĂ­i hoÆc vĂČ trĂŽ.
VÝ dî:
The earth, the moon, the Great Wall
‱ Tríc School/college/university + of +
noun
VÝ dî:
The University of Florida.
The college of Arts and Sciences.
‱ TrĂ­c cžc sĂš thĂž tĂč + noun.
VÝ dî:
The first world war.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn 1 hĂ„ (hay cžc hĂ„ Ă« sĂš Ýt).
VÝ dî:
Lake Geneva, Lake Erie
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn 1 ngĂ€n nĂłi
VÝ dî:
Mount Mckinley
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc h”nh tinh hoÆc cžc chĂŻm
sao
VÝ dî:
Venus, Mars, Earth, Orion.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc trĂȘng n”y khi trĂ­c nĂŁ l” 1
tÂȘn riÂȘng.
VÝ dî:
Cooper’s Art school, Stetson
University.
‱ TrĂ­c cžc danh tĂ” m” sau nĂŁ l” 1 sĂš
¼Õm.
The third chapter.
‱ TrĂ­c cžc cuĂ©c chiÕn tranh khu vĂčc vĂ­i
Âź iÒu kiÖn tÂȘn cžc khu vĂčc Âź ĂŁ ph¶i
Âź Ăźc tÝnh tĂ” hož.
VÝ dî:
The Korean war.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc nĂ­c cĂŁ tĂ” 2 tĂ” trĂ« lÂȘn.
NgoÂči trĂ” Great Britain.
VÝ dî:
The United States, the United
Kingdom, the Central Africal
Republic.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc nĂ­c Âź Ăźc coi l” 1 quÇn
Ÿ ¶o.
VÝ dî: The Philipin.
‱ TrĂ­c cžc t”i liÖu hoÆc sĂč kiÖn mang
tÝnh lÞch sö.
VÝ dî: The constitution, the Magna
Carta.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc nhĂŁm d ©n tĂ©c thiÓu sĂš.
VÝ dî:
The Indians, the Aztecs.
‱ NÂȘn dĂŻng trĂ­c tÂȘn cžc nhÂčc cĂŽ.
VÝ dî:
To play the piano.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc m«n hĂ€c cĂŽ thÓ.
VÝ dî:
The applied Math.
The theoretical Physics.
VÝ dî:
World war one
chapter three.
‱ Kh«ng nÂȘn dĂŻng trĂ­c tÂȘn cžc cuĂ©c
chiÕn tranh khu vĂčc nÕu tÂȘn khu vĂčc
¼Ó nguyÂȘn.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc nĂ­c cĂŁ 1 tĂ” nh : Sweden,
Venezuela v” cžc níc Ÿ ßc ŸÞng tríc
bĂ«i new hoÆc tÝnh tĂ” chØ phÂŹ ng h-
Ă­ng.
VÝ dî: New Zealand, South Africa.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc lĂŽc ¼Þa, tiÓu bang,
tØnh, th”nh phĂš, quËn, huyÖn.
VÝ dî: Europe, California.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn bÊt cĂž m«n thÓ thao n”o.
VÝ dî:
Base ball, basket ball.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc danh tĂ” mang tÝnh trĂ”u
tĂźng trĂ” nh Ă·ng trĂȘng hĂźp ¼Æc biÖt.
VÝ dî: Freedom, happiness.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc m«n hĂ€c chung.
VÝ dî:
Mathematics, Sociology.
‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc ng”y lÔ, tÕt.
VÝ dî:
Christmas, thanksgiving.
1. 3 Cžch s ö d Î n g O t h e r v ” an ot h er.
Hai tĂ” n”y tuy giĂšng nhau vÒ mÆt ng Ă· nghÜa nhng khžc nhau vÒ mÆt ng Ă·
phžp.
DĂŻng vĂ­i danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc DĂŻng vĂŁi danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc
‱ another + dt ¼ 2
sÚ it = 1 cži n ÷a, 1
cži khžc, 1 ngĂȘi n Ă·a, 1 ngĂȘi khžc.
VÝ dî: another pencil
‱ other + dt ¼ 2
sù nhiÒu = mÊy c¾i
n Ă·a, mÊy cži khžc, mÊy ngĂȘi n Ă·a,
mÊy ngĂȘi khžc.
VÝ dî: other pencils = some more.
‱ the other + dt ¼ 2
sĂš nhiÒu = nh Ă·ng
cži cuĂši cĂŻng, nh Ă·ng ngĂȘi cuĂši cĂŻng
‱ the other + dt ¼ 2
sĂš Ýt = ngĂȘi cuĂši
cïng, cži cuÚi cïng cña 1 bé, 1 nhãm.
‱ other + dt kh«ng Âź 2
= 1 chĂłt n Ă·a.
VÝ dî: other water = some more
water.
other beer = some more
beer.
‱ the other + dt kh«ng Âź 2
= chç cßn
sĂŁt lÂči.
cßn lÂči.
VÝ dî: the other pencils = all
remaining pencils
VÝ dî:
The other beer = the remaining
beer. (chç bia cßn lÂči)
- Another v” other l” kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh trong khi the other l” xžc ¼Þnh. NÕu danh
tĂ” hoÆc chñ ng Ă· Ă« trÂȘn Âź · Âź Ăźc hiÓu hoÆc Âź Ăźc nhŸc ¼Õn, chØ cÇn dĂŻng another
v” other nh 1 Âź Âči tĂ” l” Âź ñ.
VÝ dî:
I don’t want this book. Please give me another.
- NÕu danh tĂ” Âź Ăźc thay thÕ l” sĂš nhiÒu th × other Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng theo 1 trong 2
cžch (other + nouns hoÆc others) m” kh«ng bao giĂȘ Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng (others +
DTSN).
- CĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng Âź Âči tĂ” thay thÕ one hoÆc ones cho danh tĂ” sau another, the other
v” other.
Lu Ăœ r»ng this v” that cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng vĂ­i Âź Âči tĂ” one nhng these v” those tuyÖt Âź Ăši
kh«ng dïng víi ones.
1. 4 Cžch s ö d Î n g litt e r/ a litt er, f e w/ a f e w
- Littl e + d t k h«n g Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc : rÊt Ýt, hÇu nh kh«ng.
VÝ dî:
There is little water in the bottle.
I have little money, not enough to buy groceries.
- A littl e + d t k h«n g Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc: cĂŁ 1 chĂłt, Âź ñ ¼Ó dĂŻng.
VÝ dî:
I have a little money, enough to buy a ticket.
- f e w + d t Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc s Ăš n hi Ò u : cĂŁ rÊt Ýt, kh«ng Âź ñ.
VÝ dî:
She has few books, not enough for references.
- a f e w + d t Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc s Ăš n hiÒ u : cĂŁ mĂ©t Ýt, Âź ñ ¼Ó.
VÝ dî:
She has a few books, enough to read.
- NÕu danh tĂ” Ă« trÂȘn Âź · Âź Ăźc nhŸc ¼Õn th × Ă« dĂ­i chØ cÇn dĂŻng (a) few v” (a) little
nh 1 Âź Âči tĂ” l” Âź ñ.
VÝ dî:
Are you ready in money? Yes, a little.
- quite a few = quite a lot = quite a bit = kh¾ nhiÒu.
- only a few = only a little = cĂŁ rÊt Ýt ( nhÊn mÂčnh).
1. 5 S ë h ÷ u cžch
Th e + n o u n ’s + n o u n.
- ChØ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng trong cžc danh tĂ” chØ ngĂȘi hoÆc Âź Ă©ng vËt, kh«ng dĂŻng cho bÊt
Âź Ă©ng vËt.
VÝ dî:
The student’s book.
The cat’s legs.
- NÕu cĂŁ 2 danh tĂ” cĂŻng ŸÞng Ă« sĂ« h Ă·u cžch th × danh tĂ” n”o ŸÞng gÇn danh tĂ”
bÞ sĂ« h Ă·u nhÊt sÏ mang dÊu sĂ« h Ă·u.
VÝ dî:
Tom and Mark’s house.
- §Úi vĂ­i nh Ă·ng danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu Âź · cĂŁ s th × chØ cÇn ¼Æt dÊu ‘ l” Âź ñ.
VÝ dî:
The students’ books.
- Nhng Âź Ăši vĂ­i nh Ă·ng danh tĂ” cĂŁ sĂš nhiÒu ¼Æc biÖt kh«ng cĂŁ s tÂči Âź u«i vÉn ph¶i
dĂŻng nguyÂȘn dÊu sĂ« h Ă·u.
VÝ dî:
The children’s toys.
- NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng cho thĂȘi gian (nšm thžng, thÕ kĂ», thiÂȘn niÂȘn kĂ».)
VÝ dî:
The 1980’ events.
The 21 st
century’s prospect.
- NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng cho cžc mĂŻa trong nšm ngoÂči trĂ” mĂŻa Xu ©n v” mĂŻa Thu. NÕu dĂŻng sĂ«
h ÷u cžch cho mïa Xu ©n v” mïa Thu tÞc l” ta Ÿ ang nh ©n cžch hož mïa Ÿ ã.
VÝ dî:
The summer’s hot days.
The winter’s cold days.
The spring’s coming back = N”ng Xu ©n Âź ang trĂ« vÒ.
The autunm’s leaving = sĂč ra Âź i cña N”ng Thu.
TrĂȘng hĂźp n”y hiÖn nay Ýt dĂŻng. §Úi vĂ­i mĂ©t sĂš danh tĂ” bÊt Âź Ă©ng vËt chØ dĂŻng
trong 1 sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp thËt ¼Æc biÖt khi danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ n»m trong cžc th”nh ng Ă·.
VÝ dî:
A stone’s throw.
- §«i khi Âź Ăši vĂ­i nh Ă·ng danh tĂ” chØ n ÂŹi chĂšn hoÆc ¼Þa Âź iÓm chØ cÇn dĂŻng sĂ«
h Ă·u cžch cho danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ m” kh«ng cÇn danh tĂ” theo sau.
VÝ dî:
At the hairdresser’s
At the butcher’s
1. 6 S o m e , an y
so m e v” a n y nghÜa l” “1 sĂš hoÆc 1 lĂźng nhÊt ¼Þnh”. ChĂłng Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng vĂ­i
(hoÆc thay thÕ) cžc danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu hoÆc danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc.
+ So m e l” dÂčng sĂš nhiÒu cña a/ a n v” o n e :
VÝ dî: Have a biscuit/some biscuits. I ate a date/ some dates.
+ so m e, a n y of + th e/ this/ th es e/ thos e/ ÂźÂči tĂ” riÂȘn g/ ÂźÂči tĂ” s Ă« h Ă· u.
VÝ dî: Some of the staff can speak Japaneses.
Did any of your photos come out well?
+ so m e Ÿ ßc sö dÎng víi :
- Cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thÓ khÂŒng ¼Þnh.
VÝ dî:
They bought some honey.
- Trong cžc c ©u hĂĄi m” cĂŁ c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi l” ‘yes’.
VÝ dî:
Did some of you sleep on the floor? ( NgĂȘi nĂŁi chĂȘ Ÿßi c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi l” yes)
- Trong cžc c ©u ¼Ò nghÞ v” yÂȘu cÇu:
VÝ dî:
Would you like some wine?
Could you do some typing for me?
+ a n y Ÿ ßc sö dÎng:
- VĂ­i Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thÓ phñ ¼Þnh
VÝ dî:
I haven’t any matches.
- VĂ­i h ar dly, b ar ely, scar ely ( cžc phĂŁ tĂ” n”y ¼Òu mang nghÜa phñ
¼Þnh)
VÝ dî:
I have hardly any spare time.
- VĂ­i witho ut khi witho ut a n y ... = with n o ...
VÝ dî:
He crossed the frontier without any difficulty/ with no difficulty.
- Víi cžc c ©u håi
Have you got any fish?
Did he catch any fish?
- Sau if/ whether cžc th”nh ng Ă· mang tÝnh nghi ngĂȘ.
VÝ dî:
If you need any more money, please let me know.
I don’t think there is any petrol in the tank.
2. §éng tÔ ( v er b)
§éng tĂ” trong tiÕng Anh chia l”m 3 thĂȘi chÝnh:
- Quž khÞ.
- HiÖn tÂči.
- TÂŹ ng lai.
Mçi thĂȘi chÝnh lÂči chia ra l”m nhiÒu thĂȘi nhĂĄ ¼Ó xžc ¼Þnh chÝnh xžc thĂȘi gian
cña h”nh Ÿ éng.
2. 1 Hi Ö n tÂči (pr e s e n t)
2.1.1 HiÖntÂči Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n (simple present)
Khi chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt, ph¶i cĂŁ s Ă« Âź u«i v” vÇn Âź ĂŁ ph¶i Âź Ăźc Âź Ă€c
lÂȘn.
VÝ dî:
John walks to school everyday.
- NĂŁ dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng x¶y ra Ă« thĂȘi Âź iÓm hiÖn tÂči, kh«ng xžc
¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ vÒ mÆt thĂȘi gian v” h”nh Âź Ă©ng lÆp Âź i lÆp lÂči cĂŁ tÝnh quy luËt.
- NĂŁ thĂȘng dĂŻng vĂ­i 1 sĂš phĂŁ tĂ” nh: now, present day, nowadays. §Æc biÖt l”1 sĂš
phĂŁ tĂ” chØ tÇn suÊt hoÂčt Âź Ă©ng: often, sometimes, always, frequently.
VÝ dî:
They understand the problem now.
Henry always swims in the evening. (thĂŁi quen)
We want to leave now.
Your cough sounds bad.
2.1.2 HiÖn tÂči tiÕp diÔn (present progressive)
am
Subject + is + [verb
+ ing ]...
are
- NĂŁ dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź ang x¶y ra Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči. ThĂȘi gian Âź Ăźc
xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ b»ng cžc phĂŁ tĂ” nh now, right now, presently.
- NĂŁ dĂŻng ¼Ó thay thÕ cho thĂȘi tÂŹ ng lai gÇn.
VÝ dî:
He is learning in the US.
L u Ăœ : §Ó ph ©n biÖt tÂŹ ng lai gÇn v” h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź ang x¶y ra cÇn cšn cĂž v”o phĂŁ
tÔ trong c ©u)
VÝ dî:
The committee members are examining the material now. ( hiÖn tÂči Âź ang kiÓm
tra)
George is leaving for France tomorrow. (tÂŹ ng lai gÇn - sÏ rĂȘi tĂ­i Phžp v”o ng”y
mai)
2.1.3 Present perfect ( hiÖn tÂči ho”n th”nh)
Have + P2
- DĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź · x¶y ra trong 1 quž khĂž kÐo d”i v” chÊm dĂžt
Ă« hiÖn tÂči. ThĂȘi gian trong c ©u ho”n to”n kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh.
- ChØ 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng x¶y ra nhiÒu lÇn trong quž khĂž kÐo d”i tĂ­i hiÖn tÂči.
- DĂŻng vĂ­i 2 giĂ­i tĂ” for v” since + thĂȘi gian.
- DĂŻng vĂ­i already trong c ©u khÂŒng ¼Þnh, already cĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng sau have nhng
nĂŁ cĂČng cĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng cuĂši c ©u.
have
Subject + + already
+ P2
has
VÝ dî:
We have already written our reports.
I have already read the entire book.
Sam has already recorded the results of the experiment.
- DĂŻng vĂ­i yet trong c ©u phñ ¼Þnh v” c ©u nghi vÊn phñ ¼Þnh, yet thĂȘng xuyÂȘn
ŸÞng ë cuÚi c ©u, c«ng thÞc sau:
have
Subject + not + P2 ... +
yet ...
has
VÝ dî:
John hasn’t written his report yet.
The president hasn’t decided what to do yet.
We haven’t called on our teacher yet.
- Trong 1 sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp yet cĂŁ thÓ Âź ¶o lÂȘn ŸÞng sau to have v” ng Ă· phžp cĂŁ thay
Âź ĂŠi. Not mÊt Âź i v” ph ©n tĂ” 2 trĂ« vÒ dÂčng nguyÂȘn thÓ cĂŁ to.
have
Subject + + yet + [verb in
simple form] ...
has
VÝ dî:
John has yet to learn the material. = John hasn’t learned the material yet.
We have yet to decide what to do with the money. = We haven’t decided what to
do with the money yet.
ChĂł Ăœ: CÈn thËn sö dĂŽng yet trong mÉu c ©u kÎo nhÇm vĂ­i yet trong mÉu c ©u cĂŁ
yet l”m tĂ” nĂši mang nghÜa “nhng”
VÝ dî:
I don’t have the money, yet I really need the computer.
My neighbors never have the time, yet they always want to do something on
Saturday nights.
2.1.4 HiÖn tÂči ho”n th”nh tiÕp diÔn ( preset perfect progressive)
Have been + verbing.
- DĂŻng giĂšng hÖt nh present perfect nhng h”nh Âź Ă©ng kh«ng chÊm dĂžt Ă« hiÖn tÂči
m” vÉn Âź ang tiÕp tĂŽc x¶y ra. NĂŁ thĂȘng xuyÂȘn Âź Ăźc dĂŻng vĂ­i 2 giĂ­i tĂ” for, since +
time.
VÝ dî:
John has been living in the same house for ten years. = John has live in the same
house for ten years.
MĂ©t s Ăš thÝ d ĂŽ
Jorge has already walked to school. (thĂȘi gian kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh)
He has been to California three times. (h ¬n 1 lÇn)
Mary has seen this movie before. (thĂȘi gian kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh)
They have been at home all day.
We haven’t gone to the store yet. (thĂȘi gian kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh).
John has worked in Washington for three years.
HoÆc
John has been working in Washington for three years.
(vÉn cha kÕt thĂłc - John vÉn Âź ang l”m viÖc Ă« Washington).
Ph © n biÖt c žch dĂŻn g gi Ă· a 2 th ĂȘi
Present perfect Present perfect progressive
‱ H”nh Âź Ă©ng chÊm dĂžt Ă« hiÖn tÂči, do
Âź ĂŁ cĂŁ kÕt qu¶ rĂą rÖt.
VÝ dî:
I have waited for you for half an
hour (now I stop waiting)
‱ H”nh Âź Ă©ng vÉn tiÕp tĂŽc tiÕp diÔn ĂĄ
hiÖn tÂči do vËy kh«ng cĂŁ kÕt qu¶ rĂą
rÖt.
VÝ dî:
I have been waiting for you for half
an hour.
(and continue waiting hoping that
you will come)
2. 2 Q už k h Þ ( Pa st)
2.2.1 Quž khÞ Ÿ  n gi¶n (simple past)
Verb + ed
- MĂ©t sĂš Âź Ă©ng tĂ” trong tiÕng Anh cĂŁ quž khĂž ¼Æc biÖt v” Âź Ă„ng thĂȘi cĂČng cĂŁ
ph ©n tĂ” 2 ¼Æc biÖt.
- MĂ©t sĂš cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cĂŁ c¶ 2 dÂčng:
VÝ dî:
Light - lighted - lighted
lit - lit
NgĂȘi Anh a dĂŻng quž khĂž thĂȘng khi chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” ph ©n tĂ” 2 ¼Æc biÖt.
VÝ dî:
He lighted the candle on his birthday cake.
NĂŁ thŸp ngĂ€n nÕn trÂȘn chiÕc bžnh sinh nhËt
Nhng
I can see the lit house from a distance.
T«i cĂŁ thÓ nh ×n thÊy tĂ” xa ng«i nh” sžng žnh Âź iÖn.
‱ NĂŁ dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź · x¶y ra dĂžt Âź iÓm trong quž khĂž, kh«ng
liÂȘn quan g × tĂ­i hiÖn tÂči.
‱ ThĂȘi gian h”nh Âź Ă©ng trong c ©u l” rÊt rĂą r”ng, nĂŁ th ĂȘng dĂŻng vĂ­i mĂ©t sĂš phĂŁ tĂ”
chØ thĂȘi gian nh: yesterday, at that moment, last + thĂȘi gian nh:
Last night
month
week vv...
Lu Ăœ: NÕu thĂȘi gian trong c ©u l” kh«ng rĂą r”ng th × ph¶i dĂŻng present perfect.
VÝ dî:
John went to Spain last year.
Bob bought a new bicycle yesterday.
Maria did her homework last night.
Mark washed the dishes after dinner.
We drove to grocery store this afternoon.
George cooked dinner for his family Saturday night.
2.2.2 Qu¾ khþ tiÕp diÔn (Past progresive).
Was / were + Ving
- NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź ang x¶y ra Ă« v”o 1 thĂȘi Âź iÓm nhÊt
¼Þnh trong quž khĂž kh«ng liÂȘn hÖ g × tĂ­i hiÖn tÂči. ThĂȘi Âź iÓm trong c ©u Âź Ăźc xžc
¼Þnh b»ng cžc phĂŁ tĂ” chØ thĂȘi gian nh:
At + thĂȘi gian quž khĂž.
VÝ dî:
He was eating dinner at 7 P.M Last night.
- NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng kÕt hĂźp vĂ­i 1 simple past th«ng qua 2 liÂȘn tĂ” When v” while ¼Ó chØ
1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź ang x¶y ra trong quž khĂž th × 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng khžc Âź Ă©t ngĂ©t xen
v”o (tÂŹ ng Âź ÂŹ ng vĂ­i c ©u TiÕng ViÖt “ Khi Âź ang ... th × bçng”).
*
Subject1 + simple past + while + subject 2 + past
progressive.
VÝ dî:
Somebody hit him on the head while he was going to his car.
Subject1 + past progressive + when + subject 2 +
simple past.
VÝ dî:
He was going to his car when someone hit him on the head.
Lu Ăœ: MÖnh ¼Ò cĂŁ when v” while cĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng bÊt kĂș n ÂŹi n”o trong c ©u nh ng
sau when nhÊt thiÕt ph¶i l” 1 simple past v” sau while nhÊt thiÕt ph¶i l” 1 past
progressive.
- DĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 2 h”nh Âź Ă©ng song song cĂŻng 1 lĂłc, nĂši vĂ­i nhau b»ng liÂȘn tĂ”
while.
Subject1 + past progressive + while + subject 2 + past
progressive.
VÝ dî:
He was reading newspaper while his wife was preparing the dinner in the kitchen.
( MÖnh ¼Ò kh«ng cĂŁ while cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc chuyÓn sang simple past nhng hiÕm khi
v × sü nhÇm lÉn víi *)
VÝ dî:
Jose was writing a letter to his family when his pencil broke.
While Joan was writing the report, Henry was looking for more information.
When Mark arrived, the Johnsons was having dinner, but they stopped in order to
talk to him.
2.2.3 Quž khÞ ho”n th”nh (past perfect).
Had + P2
- DĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng x¶y ra tr Ă­c 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng khžc trong quž khĂž.
(trong c ©u bao giĂȘ cĂČng cĂŁ 2 h”nh Âź Ă©ng: 1 tr Ă­c v” 1 sau.
- DĂŻng kÕt hĂźp vĂ­i 1 simple past th«ng qua 2 giĂ­i tĂ” chØ thĂȘi gian before v” after.
Subject + past perfect + before + subject + past
simple
VÝ dî:
I had gone to the store before I went home.
The professor had reviewed the material before he gave the quiz.
Before Ali went to sleep, he had called his family.
George had worked at the university for forty-five years before he retired.
The doctor had examined the patient thoroughly before he prescribed the
medication.
Subject + past simple + after + subject + past
perfect
VÝ dî:
John went home after he had gone to the store.
After the committee members had considered the consequences, they voted on
the proposal.
- MÖnh ¼Ò cĂŁ before v” after cĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng ¼Çu hoÆc cuĂši c ©u nhng sau before
nhÊt thiÕt ph¶i l” 1 simple past v” sau after nhÊt thiÕt ph¶i l” 1 past perfect.
- Before v” after cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc thay b»ng when m” kh«ng sĂź bÞ nhÇm lÉn v × trong
c ©u bao giĂȘ cĂČng cĂŁ 2 h”nh Âź Ă©ng: 1 trĂ­c v” 1 sau.
VÝ dî:
The police cars came to the scene when the robbers had gone away.
( trong c ©u n”y when cĂŁ nghÜa l” after v × sau when l” past perfect.)
2.2.4 Quž khĂž ho”n th”nh tiÕp diÔn (past perfect progressive).
Subject + had + been + [Verb
+ ing]...
NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng giĂšng hÖt nh past perfect nhng h”nh Âź Ă©ng kh«ng dĂ”ng lÂči m” tiÕp
tĂŽc tiÕp diÔn cho ¼Õn thĂȘi Âź iÓm simple past. NĂŁ thĂȘng Âź Ăźc kÕt hĂźp vĂ­i 1 simple
past th«ng qua phĂŁ tĂ” before. Trong c ©u thĂȘng cĂŁ since hoÆc for + thĂȘi gian.
- ThĂȘi n”y hiÖn nay Ýt dĂŻng v” Âź Ăźc thay thÕ b»ng past perfect.
VÝ dî:
Henry had been living in New York for ten years before he moved to California.
George had been working at the university for forty-five years before he retired.
2. 3 TÂŹ n g lai
2.3.1 T ng lai Ÿ  n gi¶n (simple future)
Will / shall
+ [ Verb in simple
form ]
Can / may.
- Ng”y nay ng Ă· phžp hiÖn Âź Âči, ¼Æc biÖt l” MĂŒ dĂŻng will cho tÊt c¶ cžc ng«i cßn
shall chØ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng trong cžc trĂȘng hĂźp sau:
‱ MĂȘi mĂ€c ngĂȘi khžc 1 cžch lÞch sĂč.
VÝ dî:
Shall we go out for lunch?
Shall I take your coat?
‱ §Ò nghÞ giĂłp ŸÏ ngĂȘi khžc 1 cžch lÞch sĂč.
VÝ dî:
Shall I give you a hand with these packages.
‱ DĂŻng ¼Ó ng· giž khi mua bžn, mÆc c¶.
VÝ dî:
Shall we say : fifteen dollars?
- NĂŁ dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng sÏ x¶y ra Ă« v”o thĂȘi Âź iÓm nhÊt ¼Þnh trong
tÂŹ ng lai. ThĂȘi Âź iÓm n”y kh«ng Âź Ăźc xžc ¼Þnh rĂą rÖt. Cžc phĂŁ tĂ” thĂȘng dĂŻng l”
tomorrow, next + thĂȘi gian, in the future.
Near future. (t¬ ng lai gÇn)
To be going to do smth - sŸp l”m g ×.
- DĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng sÏ x¶y ra trong 1 t ÂŹ ng lai gÇn, thĂȘi gian sÏ Âź Ăźc
diÔn Âź Âčt b»ng 1 sĂš phĂŁ tĂ” nh : in a moment (lžt n Ă·a), tomorrow.
VÝ dî:
We are going to have a meeting in a moment.
We are going to get to the airport at 9 am this morning.
- Ng”y nay, ¼Æc biÖt l” trong všn nĂŁi ngĂȘi ta thĂȘng dĂŻng Present progressive ¼Ó
thay thÕ.
- DĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 sĂč viÖc chŸc chŸn sÏ x¶y ra dĂŻ r»ng kh«ng ph¶i l” t ÂŹ ng lai
gÇn.
VÝ dî:
Next year we are going to take a TOEFL test for the score that enables us to learn
in the US.
2.3.2 T¬ ng lai tiÕp diÔn ( future progressive)
Will / shall
+ be +
[ verb + ing ]
Can / may.
- NĂŁ diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng sÏ Âź ang x¶y ra Ă« 1 thĂȘi Âź iÓm nhÊt ¼Þnh cña t ÂŹ ng
lai. ThĂȘi Âź iÓm n”y Âź Ăźc xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ b»ng ng”y, giĂȘ.
VÝ dî:
I will be doing a test on Monday morning next week.
- NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng kÕt hĂźp vĂ­i 1 present progressive ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 2 h”nh Âź Ă©ng song
song x¶y ra, 1 Ă« hiÖn tÂči, 1 Ă« t ÂŹ ng lai.
VÝ dî:
Now we are learning English here but by the time tomorrow we will be working at
the office.
2.3.3 T ng lai ho”n th”nh (future perfect)
Will have + P2
- NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng sÏ ph¶i Âź Ăźc ho”n tÊt Ă« 1 thĂȘi Âź iÓm n”o
Âź ĂŁ trong tÂŹ ng lai. ThĂȘi Âź iÓm n”y thĂȘng Âź Ăźc diÔn Âź Âčt b»ng : by the end of, by
tomorrow.
VÝ dî:
We will have taken a TOEFL test by the end of this year.
Lu Ăœ : ThĂȘi n”y ph¶i cĂŁ lĂœ do ¼Æc biÖt mĂ­i sö dĂŽng.
3. SĂč ho ” hĂźp gi Ă· a chñ n g Ă· v ” Âź Ă© n g tĂ”.
Th«ng thĂȘng th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ŸÞng liÒn ngay vĂ­i chñ ng Ă· v” ph¶i chia theo ng«i chñ
ng Ă·. Song cĂŁ nh Ă·ng trĂȘng hĂźp kh«ng ph¶i nh vËy.
3. 1 Chñ n g ÷ Ÿ Þ n g tžc h k håi Ÿ é n g t Ô.
- §Þng xen v”o gi Ă·a chñ ng Ă· v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” l” 1 ng Ă· giĂ­i tĂ” ( 1 giĂ­i tĂ” mĂ« ¼Çu kÕt
hĂźp vĂ­i cžc danh tĂ” theo sau). Ng Ă· giĂ­i tĂ” n”y kh«ng quyÕt ¼Þnh g × ¼Õn viÖc
chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. §éng tĂ” ph¶i chia theo chñ ng Ă· chÝnh.
Subject + [ng Ă· giĂ­i tĂ”] +
verb
VÝ dî:
The study of languages is very interesting.
Singular subject singular verb
Several theories on this subject have been proposed.
Plural subject plural verb
The view of these disciplines varies from time to time.
Singular subject singular verb
The danger of forest fires is not to be taken lightly.
Singular subject singular verb
The effects of that crime are likely to be devastating.
Plural subject plural verb
The fear of rape and robbery has caused many people to flee the cities.
Singular subject singular verb
- Cžc th”nh ng Ă· trong b¶ng dĂ­i Âź © y cĂŻng vĂ­i cžc danh tĂ” Âź i Âź »ng sau nĂŁ tÂčo nÂȘn
hiÖn tĂźng Âź Ă„ng chñ ng Ă·. CĂŽm Âź Ă„ng chñ ng Ă· n”y ph¶i ŸÞng tžch biÖt ra khĂĄi
chñ ng Ă· chÝnh v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” b»ng 2 dÊu phÈy v” kh«ng cĂŁ ¶nh h Ă«ng g × tĂ­i viÖc
chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ”.
Together with along
with
accompanied
by
as well as
VÝ dî:
The actress, along with her manager and some friends, is going to a party
tonight.
Singular subject singular verb
Mr. Robbins, accompanied by his wife and children, is arriving tonight.
Singular subject singular verb
L u Ăœ : - NÕu 2 Âź Ă„ng chñ ng Ă· nĂši vĂ­i nhau b»ng liÂȘn tĂ” and th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” lËp tĂžc
ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu (they).
VÝ dî:
The actress and her manager are going to a party tonight.
- nhng nÕu 2 Âź Ă„ng chñ ng Ă· nĂši vĂ­i nhau b»ng liÂȘn tĂ” or th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sÏ
ph¶i chia theo danh tĂ” ŸÞng sau or. NÕu Âź ĂŁ l” danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt th × ph¶i chia Ă«
ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt v” ngĂźc lÂči.
VÝ dî:
The actress or her manager is going to a party tonight.
3. 2 Cžc dan h t Ă” lu«n Âź ß i h ĂĄi Âź Ă© n g t Ă” v ” Âź Âč i t Ă” s Ăš it.
§ã l” cžc Ÿ éng tÔ trong b¶ng sau:
any + danh tĂ” sĂš
Ýt
no + danh tĂ” sĂš
Ýt
Some + danh tĂ” sĂš
Ýt
anybody nobody somebody
anyone no one someone
anything nothing something
every + danh tĂ” sĂš it each + danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt
everybody
everyone either*
everything neither*
* Either v” either l” sĂš Ýt nÕu nĂŁ kh«ng Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng vĂ­i or v” nor.
Lu Ăœ:
- either (1 trong 2) chØ dĂŻng cho 2 ngĂȘi, 2 vËt. NÕu 3 ngĂȘi, 3 vËt trĂ« lÂȘn ph¶i dĂŻng
any.
VÝ dî:
If either of you takes a vacation now, we won’t be able to finish this work.
If any of students in this class is absent, he or she must have the permission of
the instructor.
- Neither (kh«ng 1 trong 2) chØ dĂŻng cho 2 ngĂȘi, 2 vËt. NÕu 3 ngĂȘi, 3 vËt trĂ« lÂȘn
ph¶i dïng not any).
VÝ dî:
Neither of two his classes gets an “c ”
Not any of those pairs of shoes fits me.
3. 3 Cžch s ö d Î n g n on e, n o
none of the : Ÿ ßc sö dÎng tïy theo danh tÔ ŸÞng Ÿ »ng sau nã.
- nÕu danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ l” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt.
None + of the + non-count noun + singular verb
VÝ dî:
None of the counterfeit money has been found.
- nÕu sau none of the l” 1 danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc sĂš nhiÒu th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă«
ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu.
None + of the + plural noun + plural verb
VÝ dî:
None of the students have finished the exam yet.
No Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng cĂČng tuĂș theo danh tĂ” ŸÞng sau nĂŁ.
- nÕu sau no l” danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt hoÆc kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă«
ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt.
Singular noun
No + +
singular verb
non-count noun
VÝ dî:
No example is relevant to this case.
- nhng nÕu sau no l” 1 danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc sĂš nhiÒu th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i
thþ 3 sù nhiÒu.
No + plural noun + plural
verb
VÝ dî:
No examples are relevant to this case.
3. 4 Cžch s ö d ĂŽ n g c Ê u trĂłc eit h e r ... or v ” n eit h e r ... n or.
§iÒu cÇn lu Ăœ nhÊt khi sö dĂŽng cÆp th”nh ng Ă· n”y l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau Âź ĂŁ ph¶i chia
theo danh tĂ” sau or hoÆc nor. NÕu danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ l” sĂš Ýt th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă«
ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt v” ngĂźc lÂči.
Neither nor
+ noun + singular noun +
singular verb
either or
VÝ dî:
Neither John nor Bill is going to the beach today.
Singular noun singular verb
Either John or Bill is going to the beach today.
Singular noun singular verb
Neither nor
+ noun + plural noun +
plural verb
either or
VÝ dî:
Neither Maria nor her friends are going to class today.
Plural plural
Lu Ăœ :
Khi chñ ng Ă· l” 1 verbing th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt.
3. 5 Cžc dan h t Ă” t Ë p t h Ó
§ã l” nh Ă·ng danh tĂ” trong b¶ng dĂ­i Âź © y dĂŻng ¼Ó chØ mĂ©t nhĂŁm ngĂȘi hoÆc 1 tĂŠ
chĂžc. Cho dĂŻ vËy, chĂłng vÉn Âź Ăźc xem l” danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt v” do Âź ĂŁ, cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v”
Âź Âči tĂ” Âź i cĂŻng vĂ­i chĂłng ph¶i Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt.
congress family group committe
e
class
organizati
on
team army club crowd
governme
nt
jury majority
*
minority public
- NÕu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Âź »ng sau nh Ă·ng danh tĂ” n”y chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu th × nĂŁ
ž m chØ cžc th”nh viÂȘn cña tĂŠ chĂžc hoÆc nhĂŁm Âź ĂŁ Âź ang hoÂčt Âź Ă©ng riÂȘng rÏ.
VÝ dî: The congress votes for the bill.
The congress are discussing the bill (some agree but some don’t).
(TOEFL kh«ng bŸt lçi n”y)
* Majority
Danh tĂ” n”y Âź Ăźc dĂŻng tuĂș theo danh tĂ” Âź i Âź »ng sau nĂŁ.
The majority + singular verb
The majority of the plural noun + plural
verb.
VÝ dî: The majority believes that we are in no danger.
The majority of the students believe him to be innocent.
L u Ăœ : Danh tĂ” police lu«n Âź Ăźc coi l” danh tĂ” ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu do vËy Âź Ă©ng tĂ”
Âź »ng sau nĂŁ ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu.
VÝ dî:
The police come to the crime scene at good time and arrested a suspect.
M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ:
The committee has met, and it has rejected the proposal.
The family was elated by the news.
The crowd was wild with excitement.
Congress has initiated a new plan to combat inflation.
The organization has lost many members this year.
Our team is going to win the game.
Cžc cĂŽm tĂ” trong b¶ng dĂ­i Âź © y chØ mĂ©t nhĂŁm gia sĂłc Âź Ă©ng vËt cho dĂŻ danh tĂ”
Âź »ng sau giĂ­i tĂ” of cĂŁ Ă« sĂš nhiÒu th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau Âź ĂŁ vÉn ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3
sù Ýt.
flock of birds,
sheep
herd of
cattle
pack of
dogs
school of
fish
pride of
lions
VÝ dî:
The flock of birds is circling overhead.
The herd of cattle is breaking away.
A school of fish is being attacked by sharks.
L u Ăœ : TÊt c¶ cžc danh tĂ” tËp hĂźp chØ thĂȘi gian, tiÒn bÂčc, sĂš Âź o ¼Òu ¼ßi hĂĄi cžc
Âź Ă©ng tĂ” - Âź Âči tĂ” - bĂŠ ng Ă· Âź i cĂŻng nĂŁ ph¶i Ă« ng«i sĂš Ýt.
(TOEFL bŸt lçi n”y).
VÝ dî:
He has contributed $50 and now he wants to contribute another fifty.
Twenty-five dollars is too much to pay for that shirt.
Fifty minutes isn’t enough time to finish this test.
Twenty dollars is all I can afford to pay for that recorder.
Two miles is too much to run in one day.
3. 6 Cžch s ö d Î n g A n u m b e r of/ t h e n u m b e r of
a number of + danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu + Âź Ă©ng tĂ”
Ă« sĂš nhiÒu
- a n u m b e r of : mĂ©t sĂš lĂźng lĂ­n nhĂžng... . §i vĂ­i danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i
chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu.
- t h e n u m b e r of : mĂ©t sĂš.... §i vĂŁi danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu nhng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă«
ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt.
the number of + danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu +
Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« sĂš Ýt
VÝ dî:
A number of applicants have already been interviewed.
The number of residents who have been questioned on this matter is quite small
3. 7 Cžc dan h t Ă” lu«n dĂŻn g Ă« s Ăš n hi Ò u.
Cžc danh tĂ” sau Âź © y lu«n ph¶i dĂŻng Ă« dÂčng sĂš nhiÒu.
Trousers eyeglasses tongs - c¾i kÑp
shorts scissors- cži
kÐo
tweezers- cži
nhÝp
Jeans pants- quÇn pliers - c¾i k × m
VÝ dî:
The pants are in the drawer.
A pair of pants is in the drawer.
Cžc danh tĂ” trÂȘn thĂȘng xuyÂȘn Ă« dÂčng sĂš nhiÒu v × chĂłng bao gĂ„m 2 thĂčc thÓ, do
vËy cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” Âź Âči tĂ” Âź i cĂŻng chĂłng ph¶i Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu.
VÝ dî:
The pliers are on the table.
These scissors are dull.
- NÕu muĂšn biÕn chĂłng th”nh sĂš Ýt dĂŻng a pair of ... v” lĂłc Âź ĂŁ Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” Âź Âči tĂ”
Âź i cĂŻng vĂ­i chĂłng ph¶i Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt.
VÝ dî:
This pair of scissors is dull.
The pair of pliers is on the table.
3. 8 Cžch dïn g cžc t h ” n h n g ÷ Th e r e is, t h e r e ar e
Th”nh ng Ă· n”y chØ sĂč tĂ„n tÂči cña ngĂȘi hoÆc vËt tÂči 1 n ÂŹi n”o Âź ĂŁ. Ph¶i ph ©n
biÖt chĂłng vĂ­i Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to have.
There is
There are
chØ sĂč tĂ„n tÂči
(existance)
To have chØ sĂč sĂ« h Ă·u (possession)
To possess (get, hold instinctively).
- Chñ ng Ă· thËt cña th”nh ng Ă· n”y Âź i Âź »ng sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be. NÕu danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ
l” sĂš nhiÒu th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” chia Ă« sĂš nhiÒu v” ngĂźc lÂči.
- MĂ€i biÕn Âź ĂŠi vÒ thĂȘi v” thÓ ¼Òu nh»m v”o Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be cßn ph ©n tĂ” 2 th ×
dĂča v”o trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to have/ has been.
there is
there was + singular
subject ...
there has been ( hoÆc non-
count)
there are
there were + singular
subject ...
there have been ( hoÆc non-
count)
VÝ dî:
There is a storm approaching.
singular singular
There have been a number of telephone calls today.
Plural plural
There was an accident last night.
singular singular
There were too many people at the party.
Plural plural
There has been an increase in the importation of foreign cars.
Plural plural
There was water on the floor where he fell.
Plural non-count
4. §Âči tĂ”
§Âči tĂ” trong tiÕng Anh chia 5 loÂči cĂŁ cžc chĂžc nšng riÂȘng biÖt.
4. 1 §Âči t Ă” n h © n xn g c h ñ n g Ă· ( S u bj e c t pr on o u n)
GĂ„m :
I we
you you
he they
she
it
ChÞc nšng:
- §Þng ¼Çu c ©u l”m chñ ng Ă· trong c ©u v” quyÕt ¼Þnh viÖc chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ”.
- §Þng Ÿ »ng sau Ÿ éng tÔ to be.
VÝ dî: The teachers who were invited to the party were George, Batty.
- §Þng Âź »ng sau cžc phĂŁ tĂ” so sžnh nh than, as. TuyÖt Âź Ăši kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng Âź Âči tĂ”
nh ©n xng t ©n ng Ă· trong trĂȘng hĂźp n”y.
VÝ dĂŽ: He is taller than I (am) - kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng me.
She is as beautiful as my girlfriend.
- §Úi vĂ­i cžc Âź Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng chñ ng Ă· nh we, you v” Âź Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng t ©n ng Ă·
nh us cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng 1 danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu ngay sau Âź ĂŁ.
VÝ dî: We students, you teachers, us workers.
Cžc Âź Âči tĂ” nh all, both cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng theo lĂši n”y vĂ­i cžc ng«i sĂš nhiÒu.
we
you all/ both
they
VÝ dî:
I am going to the store.
We have lived here for twenty years.
It was she who called you. (sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” be)
George and I would like to leave now.
We students are going to have a party.
4. 2 §Âči t Ă” n h © n xn g t © n n g Ă·
me us
you you
him
them
her
it
- nĂŁ ŸÞng ngay sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” hoÆc cžc giĂ­i tĂ” l”m nhiÖm vĂŽ cña mĂ©t t ©n ng Ă·.
- Âź Ăši vĂ­i cžc ng«i Âź Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng t ©n ng Ă· Ă« sĂš nhiÒu cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng all hoÆc both
ngay sau Âź ĂŁ.
us
you all / both
them
VÝ dî:
They called us on the phone.
complement
The teacher gave him a bad grade.
complement
John told her a story.
complement
The policeman was looking for him.
sau giĂ­i tĂ”
To us, it seems like a good bargain
sau giĂ­i tĂ”
L u Ăœ : NÂȘn nhĂ­ r»ng nhiÒu giĂ­i tĂ” cĂŁ thÓ cĂŁ chĂžc nšng nh cžc th”nh phÇn khžc
trong c ©u, chÂŒng hÂčn nh phĂŁ tĂ” hoÆc liÂȘn tĂ”. V× vËy, ta cÇn ph¶i xžc ¼Þnh cžc
xem chĂłng Âź ĂŁng vai trß g × - cÇn dĂča v”o ng Ă· c¶nh chĂž kh«ng ph¶i dĂča v”o sĂč
hiÓu biÕt b ×nh thĂȘng vÒ chĂžc nšng cña chĂłng.
VÝ dî:
Janet will make her presentation after him.
preposition complement pronoun
Janet will make her presentation after he finishes his speech.
conjunction subject pronoun
clause
( mĂ©t mÖnh ¼Ò (clause) gĂ„m 1 chñ ng Ă· v” 1 Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. Trong mÖnh ¼Ò trÂȘn, he
l” chñ ng ÷ v” finishes l” Ÿ éng tÔ).
4. 3 TÝn h t Ă” s Ă« h Ă· u
my our
your your
his
her their
its
- NĂŁ ŸÞng ngay trĂ­c danh tĂ” v” chØ sĂč sĂ« h Ă·u cña ngĂȘi hoÆc vËt Âź Ăši vĂ­i danh tĂ”
ŸÞng Ÿ »ng sau.
VÝ dî:
John is eating his dinner.
This is not my book.
The cat has injured its foot.
The boy broke his arm yesterday..
She forgot her homework this morning.
My food is cold.
L u Ăœ : Its khžc vĂ­i It’s. It’s cĂŁ nghÜa l” it is hoÆc it has.
4. 4 §Âči t Ă” s Ă« h Ă· u
mine ours
yours yours
his
hers theirs
its
- DĂŻng ¼Ó thay thÕ cho tÝnh tĂ” sĂ« h Ă·u v” danh tĂ” Âź · Âź Ăźc nhŸc ¼Õn Ă« trÂȘn.
possessive pronoun + possessive
adjective + noun
- NĂŁ cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc ŸÞng l”m chñ ng Ă· trong c©u.
- §Þng Ÿ »ng sau Ÿ éng tÔ to be.
- NĂŁ cĂŁ thÓ l”m t ©n ng Ă· khi Âź i sau 1 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” hoÆc sau 1 giĂ­i tĂ”.
Do you remember to take your money?
- §Þng Ÿ »ng sau cžc phã tÔ so sžnh nh than, as.
Your book is as good as mine.
M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ:
This is my book = This is mine.
Your teacher is the same as his teacher = Yours is as the same as his.
Her dress is green and my dress is red = Hers is green is green and mine is red.
Our books are heavy = Ours are heavy.
Their coasts are too small. Theirs are too small.
I forgot my homework = I forgot mine.
4. 5 §Âči t Ă” p h¶n t h © n (r efl exiv e pron o un)
myself
ourselves
yourself
yourselves
himself
themselves
herself
itself
L u Ăœ : Ă« cžc ng«i sĂš nhiÒu, Âź u«i - self biÕn th”nh - selves.
Ch Þc nšn g:
- ChØ chñ ng Ă· l”m viÖc g × Âź ĂŁ cho chÝnh m ×nh. Trong tr ĂȘng hĂźp n”y nĂŁ ŸÞng
ngay sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” hoÆc ŸÞng Ă« cuĂši c ©u sau giĂ­i tĂ” for hoÆc to.
VÝ dî:
He sent the letter to himself.
You can see the differences for yourselves.
- ChØ chñ ng Ă· tĂč th ©n l”m lÊy 1 viÖc g ×. Trong trĂȘng hĂźp n”y nĂŁ ŸÞng Âź »ng
sau chñ ng Ă· hoÆc cuĂši c ©u khi nĂŁi.
VÝ dî:
I myself believe that the proposal is good.
He himself set out to break the long distance flying record.
She prepared the nine-course meal herself.
The students themselves decorated the room.
You yourself must do this homework.
John himself bought this gifts.
By + o n e-s elf = alon e.
VÝ dî:
John washed the dishes by himself = John washed the dishes alone.
5. §éng tÔ dïn g l” m t©n n g ÷
- Kh«ng ph¶i bÊt cĂž Âź Ă©ng tĂ” n”o trong tiÕng Anh cĂČng ¼ßi hĂĄi 1 danh tĂ” hoÆc
Âź Âči tĂ” theo sau nĂŁ l”m t ©n ng Ă·. CĂŁ mĂ©t sĂš Âź Ă©ng tĂ” lÂči yÂȘu cÇu t ©n ng Ă· sau nĂŁ
ph¶i l” mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khžc. ChĂłng chia l”m 2 loÂči sau:
5. 1 §én g t Ă” n g u y ÂȘ n t h Ó l” m t © n n g Ă·
B¶ng sau l” nh Ă·ng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼ßi hĂĄi t ©n ng Ă· sau nĂŁ ph¶i l” mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khžc.
ChĂłng tu ©n theo mÉu c ©u nh sau:
agree to do something.
desire to do something.
decide to do something.
agree
desire
hope
plan
strive
attemp
t
expect
intend
prepar
e
tend
claim
fail
learn
preten
d
want
decid
e
forget
need
refuse
wish
deman
d
hesitat
e
offer
seem
VÝ dî:
John expects to begin studying law next semester.
Mary learned to swim when she was very young.
The budget committee decided to postpone this meeting.
The president will attempt to reduce inflation in the next your years.
The soldiers are preparing to attack a village.
Cynthia has agreed to act as a liaison between the two countries.
5. 2 Vin g dïn g l” m t © n n g ÷
- B¶ng sau l” 1 sĂš cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼ßi hĂĄi t ©n ng Ă· sau nĂŁ l” 1 Ving theo cžc mÉu
c ©u sau:
admit doing something (thĂł nhËn l”m g ×)
VÝ dî: He admitted having done wrong.
Enjoy doing something (thÝch thĂł khi l”m Âź iÒu g ×)
admit
delay
miss
report
suggest
appreciat
e
deny
postpone
resent
avoid
enjoy
practice
resist
can’t
help
finish
quit
resume
conside
r
mind
recall
risk
L u Ăœ : Trong b¶ng trÂȘn cĂŁ mÉu Âź Ă©ng tĂ”:
can’t help
can’t resist
VÝ dî:
With such good oranges, we can’t help (resist) buying 2 kilos at a time.
L u Ăœ : NÕu muĂšn ¼Æt phñ ¼Þnh cho cžc tr ĂȘng hĂźp n”y ¼Æt not trĂ­c nguyÂȘn thÓ
bĂĄ to hoÆc Ving. TuyÖt Âź Ăši kh«ng Âź Ăźc cÊu tÂčo dÂčng phñ ¼Þnh cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ”
chÝnh.
VÝ dî:
John decided not to by the car.
We regretted not going to the party last night.
M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ:
John admitted stealing the jewels.
We enjoy seeing them again after so many years.
You shouldn’t risk entering that building in its present condition.
Michael was considering buying a new car until the price went up.
The Coast Guard reported seeing another ship in the Florida Straits.
Would you mind not smoking in this office?
* Cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« b¶ng sau l” nh Ă·ng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” m” t ©n ng Ă· cña chĂłng cĂŁ thÓ l”
Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ hay Ving m” ng Ă· nghÜa cña chĂłng kh«ng thay Âź ĂŠi.
VÝ dî:
begin to do smth = begin doing smth.
+ (against) doing smth : kh«ng thÓ dĂ”ng Âź Ăźc, kh«ng thÓ
nhÞn ¼ üc ...
begin
hate
regret
can’t
stand
like
start
continu
e
love
try
dread
prefer
L u Ăœ: Trong b¶ng trÂȘn cĂŁ mÉu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” :
to do smth
doing smth
VÝ dî:
waiting such a long time.
to wait such a long time.
I hate to ride her bicycle to school = I hate riding her bicycle to school.
5. 3 3 Âź Ă© n g t Ă” Âź Æ c bi Ö t
§ã l” cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” m” ng Ă· nghÜa cña chĂłng thay Âź ĂŠi khi t ©n ng Ă· sau nĂŁ l” 1
nguyÂȘn thÓ hoÆc 1 Ving.
Stop to do smth : dĂ”ng lÂči ¼Ó l”m g ×.
VÝ dî:
He stops to get gasoline.
Stop doing smth : dĂ”ng viÖc g × Âź ang l”m lÂči.
VÝ dî:
He stops writing and goes out.
Remember to do smth : nhĂ­ sÏ ph¶i l”m g ×.
VÝ dî:
I remember to send a letter at the post office.
Remember doing smth : nhĂ­ Âź · l”m g ×.
VÝ dî:
I remember locking the door before leaving but I can’t find the key.
Forget to do smth : quÂȘn sÏ ph¶i l”m g ×.
VÝ dî:
He forgets to call his friend this afternoon.
Forget doing smth : quÂȘn Âź · l”m g ×.
VÝ dî:
I forget doing the homework yesterday.
L u Ăœ : §éng tĂ” forget trong mÉu c ©u mang nghÜa phñ ¼Þnh.
I forget getting to the airport to meet my girl-friend this morning.
( Kh«ng thÓ chÞu Âź Ăčng Âź Ăźc khi ph¶i l”m
g ×)
can’t
stand
I can’t stand
5. 4 Cžc Ÿ é n g t Ô Ÿ Þ n g Ÿ » n g s a u giíi t Ô
- TÊt c¶ cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ŸÞng Âź »ng sau giĂ­i tĂ” ¼Òu ph¶i Ă« dÂčng Ving.
verb
adj. + preposition + Ving
noun
§én g t Ô + giíi t Ô + Ving
B¶ng sau gÄm cžc Ÿ éng tÔ + giíi tÔ.
approve of: tžn
th”nh
give up: tĂ” bĂĄ
rely on: phÎ thuéc
v”o
worry about: lo
lŸng vÒ
be better off:
insist on: n”i nØ
succeed in: th”nh c«ng
trong
count on = rely on
keep on =
continue
think about
think of
depend on
put off: tr × ho·n
Dan h t Ô + giíi t Ô + Ving (b¶n g s a u)
possibility
of
choice of
method of
intention
of
method
for
excuse
for
reason
for
VÝ dî:
George has no excuse for dropping out of school.
There is a possibility of acquiring this property at a good price.
There is no reason for leaving this early.
Connie has developed a method for evaluating this problem.
TÝnh t Ă” + giĂ­i t Ă” + Ving (b¶n g s a u)
accustomed
to
intent on
afraid of
interested
in
capable of
successful
in
fond of
tired of
VÝ dî:
Mitch is afraid of getting married now.
We are accustomed to sleeping late on weekends.
Jean is not capable of understanding the predicament.
Alvaro is intent on finishing school next year.
Craig is fond of dancing.
We are interested in seeing this film.
- Kh«ng ph¶i bÊt cĂž tÝnh tĂ” n”o trong tiÕng Anh cĂČng ¼ßi hĂĄi Âź Ÿng sau nĂŁ ph¶i
l” 1 giĂ­i tĂ”, cĂŁ mĂ©t sĂš tÝnh tĂ” lÂči ¼ßi hĂĄi Âź »ng sau nĂŁ l” mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ
(xem b¶ng sau).
anxious
eager: hžo
hĂžc
pleased
usual
boring
easy
prepare
d
commo
n
dangero
us
good
ready
difficult
hard
strang
e
able*
eager to do smth: hžo hĂžc l”m g ×.
hard to do smth : khĂŁ l”m g ×.
* able :
able capable
unable incapable
VÝ dî:
These students are not yet able to handle such difficult problems.
These students are not yet capable of handling such difficult problems.
M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ:
Mohammad is eager to see his family.
It is dangerous to drive in this weather
We are ready to leave now.
It is difficult to pass this test.
It is uncommon to find such good crops in this section of the country.
Ritsuko was pleased to be admitted to the college.
L u Ăœ:
- MĂ©t sĂš cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” tiÕng Anh th ĂȘng cĂŁ giĂ­i tĂ” Âź i kÌm Ă« phÝa sau. Kh«ng Âź Ăźc
nhÇm lÉn giĂ­i tĂ” Âź ĂŁ vĂ­i to cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ. ChÂŒng hÂčn mĂ©t sĂš Âź Ă©ng tĂ”
trong b¶ng sau:
object to: ph¶n
Âź Ăši
look forward to : mong
Ÿßi
confess to : thĂł nhËn Âź ·
l”m g ×
VÝ dî:
John gave up smoking because of his doctor’s advice.
Mary insisted on taking the bus instead of the plane.
Fred confessed to stealing the jewels.
We are not looking forward to going back to school.
Henry is thinking of going to France in August.
You would be better off leaving now instead of tomorrow.
to do smth
=
of doing smth
5. 5 VÊn Âź Ò Âź Âč i t Ă” Âź i tr Ă­c Âź Ă© n g t Ă” n g u y ÂȘ n t h Ó h o Æ c Vin g l” m
t © n n g ÷ .
- §Þng trĂ­c 1 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ l”m t ©n ng Ă· th × dÂčng cña Âź Âči tĂ” ph¶i l” t ©n
ng Ă·.
Pronoun
Subject + verb + complement form + [
to + verb] ...
noun
Sau Âź © y l” b¶ng cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼ßi hĂĄi Âź Âči tĂ” (hay danh tĂ” ) Âź i sau nĂŁ ph¶i Ă«
dÂčng t ©n ng Ă·.
allow
invite
remind
ask
order
urge
beg
permi
t
want
convinc
e
persuad
e
expect
instruct
prepare
promise
VÝ dî:
Joe asked Mary to call him when he woke up.
We ordered him to appear in court.
I urge you to consider your decision.
They were trying to persuade him to change his mind.
The teacher permitted them to turn their assignments in late.
You should prepare your son to take this examination.
Tuy nhiÂȘn, ŸÞng trĂ­c 1 Ving l”m t ©n ng Ă· th × dÂčng cña danh tĂ” hoÆc Âź Âči tĂ” ph¶i
Ă« dÂčng sĂ« h Ă·u.
dÂčng sĂ« h Ă·u cña danh tĂ”
Chñ ng ÷ + Ÿ éng tÔ + +
[verb + ing] ...
tÝnh tĂ” sĂ« h Ă·u
VÝ dî:
We understand your not being able to stay longer.
He regrets her leaving.
We are looking forward to their coming next year.
We don’t approve of John’s buying this house.
We resent the teacher’s not announcing the test sooner.
We object to their calling at this hour.
6. Cžch sö dĂŽn g Âź Ă© n g tĂ” b ž n khiÕ m khuy Õt n e e d v ” d ar e
6.1 n e e d
§éng tĂ” n”y Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng ra sao cßn phĂŽ thuĂ©c v”o danh tĂ” ŸÞng Âź »ng sau nĂŁ l”
Âź Ă©ng vËt hay bÊt Âź Ă©ng vËt.
- khi chñ ng Ă· l” Âź Ă©ng vËt (living thing)
Subject as a living thing + need +
to + verb
(cÇn ph¶i l”m g ×)
VÝ dî:
I need to clean my house.
John and his brother need to paint the house.
My friend needs to learn Spanish.
He will need to drive alone tonight.
-Tuy nhiÂȘn khi chñ ng Ă· l” mĂ©t bÊt Âź Ă©ng vËt (unliving thing) th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau
need sÏ ¼ éi kh¾c.
Subject as unliving thing + need +
[Verb + ing]
to
be + P2
VÝ dî:
The grass needs to be cut. HoÆc The grass needs cutting.
The television needs repairing. HoÆc The television need to be repaired.
The composition needs rewriting. HoÆc The composition needs to be
rewritten.
L u Ăœ:
need = to be in need of +
noun
to be in need of + noun cĂŁ thÓ thay thÕ cho c¶ 2 c«ng thĂžc trÂȘn.
VÝ dî:
Jill is in need of money = Jill needs money.
The roof is in need of repair = The roof needs to be repaired.
The organization was in need of volunteers = The organization needed
volunteers.
6.2 Dare
- Dare kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng nhiÒu Ă« khÂŒng ¼Þnh. NĂŁ chØ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng Ă« phñ ¼Þnh v”
nghi vÊn. §éng tĂ” sau nĂŁ theo lĂœ thuyÕt l” cĂŁ to nhng trÂȘn thĂčc tÕ thĂȘng bĂĄ to. NĂŁ
cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng vĂ­i trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to do hoÆc dĂŻng trĂčc tiÕp.
He doesn’t dare (to) say anything
= He dares not (to) say anything.
Does he dare (to) say anything = Dares he (to) say anything.
- Dare kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng Ă« thÓ khÂŒng ¼Þnh trĂ” tr ĂȘng hĂźp - I dare say mang 2
nghÜa:
- T«i cho l”.
VÝ dî: I dare say there will be a restaurant car at the end of the train.
- T«i c«ng nhËn l”.
VÝ dĂŽ: I dare say you are right. T«i thĂ”a nhËn l” anh Âź Ăłng.
- How dare (dared) + subject ... (sao džm).
VÝ dî:
How dare you open my letter? Sao cËu džm bĂŁc th cña t«i ra thÕ ?
- Dare cßn Âź Ăźc dĂŻng nh 1 ngoÂči Âź Ă©ng tĂ” mang nghÜa džm, thžch theo mÉu c ©u
sau:
To dare smb to do
smth
(thžch ai l”m g ×)
They dare the boy to swim across the river in the cold weather.
7. Cžch dïn g Ÿ é n g tÔ to b e + infinitive
BE + INFINITIVE
- NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng ¼Ó truyÒn Âź Âčt nh Ă·ng mÖnh lÖnh hoÆc nh Ă·ng chØ dÉn ttĂ” ng ĂȘi
thĂž nhÊt qua ngĂȘi thĂž 2 tĂ­i ngĂȘi thĂž 3.
VÝ dî:
No one is to leave this building without the permission of the police.
(kh«ng ai Âź Ăźc phÐp rĂȘi to” nh” n”y m” kh«ng Âź Ăźc phÐp cña c¶nh sžt).
He is to stay here until we return.
(nĂŁ ph¶i Ă« lÂči Âź © y cho tĂ­i khi bĂ€n tao quay lÂči).
- DĂŻng vĂ­i mÖnh ¼Ò if mang tÝnh bŸt buĂ©c hoÆc mÖnh lÖnh.
VÝ dî:
Something must be done quickly if extinct birds are to be saved
He said if he fall asleep at the wheel, we were to wake him up.
- ¼Ó truyÒn Âź Âčt mĂ©t dĂč ¼Þnh.
VÝ dî:
She is to be married next month.
(c« Êy sÏ cĂ­i v”o thžng tĂ­i)
The expedition is to start in a week’s time.
CÊu trĂłc n”y rÊt th«ng dĂŽng trong bžo chÝ v” nÕu nĂŁ l” tĂča ¼Ò bžo th × ng ĂȘi ta
bá be ¼ i ¼Ó tiÕt kiÖm chç.
VÝ dî:
The Prime Minister is to make a statement tomorrow.
= The Prime Minister to make a statement tomorrow.
- Was/ were + infinitive
§Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 Ăœ tĂ«ng vÒ sĂš mÖnh.
VÝ dî:
They said good bye without knowing that they were never to meet again.
(hĂ€ chia tay nhau m” kh«ng biÕt r»ng sÏ chÂŒng bao giĂȘ hĂ€ gÆp lÂči nhau)
- To be about to + verb = near future = to be in the point of Ving.
8. C©u h åi
8.1 C © u h åi y e s v ” n o
SĂ« dÜ gĂ€i l” nh vËy v × trong c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng yes hoÆc no Ă« ¼Çu c ©u.
NÂȘn nhĂ­ r»ng:
Yes + positive verb
No + negative verb.
Kh«ng Âź Ăźc nhÇm lÉn dÂčng c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi tiÕng viÖt.
auxiliary
be + subject
+ verb ...
do, does, did
Is Mary going to school today?
Was Mary sick yesterday?
Have you seen this movie before?
Will the committee decide on the proposal today?
Do you want to use the telephone?
Does George like peanut butter?
Did you go to class yesterday?
8. 2 C © u h åi t h«n g bžo
L” loÂči c ©u hĂĄi m” trong c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi ngo”i yes hoÆc no ra cßn ph¶i thÂȘm mĂ©t sĂš
cžc th«ng tin khžc. Cžc c ©u hĂĄi n”y dĂŻng vĂ­i mĂ©t sĂš cžc Âź Âči tĂ” nghi vÊn.
8.2.1 who v” what l”m chñ ng ÷.
Who
+ verb + (complement) +
(modifier)
what
Who opened the door? (someone opened the door)
What happened last night? (something happened last night.)
Ch Ăł Ăœ: Kh«ng Âź Ăłng khi nĂŁi :
Who did open the door?
What did happen last night?
8.2.2 Whom v” what l” t ©n ng ÷ cña c©u håi
whom auxiliary
+ + subject + verb
+ ( modifier)
what do, does, did
Ch Ăł Ăœ:
MÆc dĂŻ trong všn nĂŁi, nhiÒu ngĂȘi sö dĂŽng who thay cho whom trong loÂči c ©u hĂĄi
n”y nhng tuyÖt Âź Ăši kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng nh vËy trong všn viÕt (lçi c ÂŹ b¶n)
VÝ dî:
Whom does Ahmad know from Venezuela? ( Ahmad know someone from
Venezuela)
What did George buy at the store? ( George bought something at the store)
8.2.3 C©u håi d”nh cho cžc bÊ ng ÷ (when, where, wh y, how)
when
where
why
how
When did John move to Jacksonville?
Where does Mohamad live ?
Why did George leave so early?
Auxiliary
+ be + subject + verb +
(complement) + (modifier)
do, does, did
How did Maria get to school today?
Where has Henry gone?
When will Bertha go back to Mexico?
8. 3 C © u h ĂĄi gižn ti Õ p (e m b e d d e d q u e s tion s)
L” loÂči c ©u hĂĄi cĂŁ cžc ¼Æc Âź iÓm sau:
- C©u cĂŁ 2 th”nh phÇn nĂši vĂ­i nhau b»ng 1 Âź Âči tĂ” nghi vÊn.
- Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò 2 ph¶i ŸÞng xu«i sau chñ ng Ă· kh«ng Âź Ăźc cÊu tÂčo c ©u hĂĄi
Ă« th”nh phÇn thĂž 2.
- Âź Âči tĂ” nghi vÊn kh«ng chØ bao gĂ„m 1 tĂ” m” nhiÒu khi cĂŁ thÓ l” 2 hoÆc 3 tĂ”
chÂŒng hÂčn: whose + noun, how many, how much, how long, how often, what
time, v” what kind.
Subject + verb ( phrase) + question word +
subject + verb
VÝ dî:
C©u håi : Where will the meeting take place?
C©u hĂĄi gižn tiÕp: We haven’t ascertained where the meeting will take place.
Q word subject verb phrase
C©u håi: Why did the plane land at the wrong airport?
C©u hĂĄi gižn tiÕp : The authorities cannot figure out why the plane landed at the
wrong airport.
Q word subject phrase
auxiliary + subject + verb + question word +
subject + verb
Do you know where he went?
Could you tell me what time it is?
M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ:
The professor didn’t know how many students would be in her afternoon
class.
I have no idea how long the interview will take.
Do they know how often the bus runs at night?
Can you tell me how far the museum is from the college?
I’ll tell you what kind of ice cream tastes best.
The teacher asked us whose book was on his desk.
8. 4 C © u h åi c㠟 u«i
Khi sö dĂŽng loÂči c ©u hĂĄi n”y nÂȘn nhĂ­ r»ng nĂŁ kh«ng nh»m mĂŽc ¼Ých Âź ÂȘ hĂĄi m”
nh»m ¼Ó khÂŒng ¼Þnh lÂči Ăœ kiÕn cña b¶n th ©n m ×nh Âź · biÕt.
- C©u chia l”m 2 th”nh phÇn tžch biÖt nhau bĂ«i dÊu phÈy.
- NÕu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« phÇn chÝnh Ă« thÓ khÂŒng ¼Þnh th × Ă« phÇn Âź u«i l” phñ ¼Þnh
v” ngĂźc lÂči.
- §éng tĂ” to be Âź Ăźc dĂŻng trĂčc tiÕp, cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” thĂȘng dĂŻng trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to do, cžc
Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thĂȘi kÐp: future, perfect, progressive dĂŻng vĂ­i chÝnh trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cña
thĂȘi Âź ĂŁ.
- Cžc th”nh ng Ă· there is, there are v” it is dĂŻng lÂči Ă« phÇn Âź u«i.
- §éng tĂ” to have trong tiÕng Anh cña ngĂȘi MĂŒ l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” thĂȘng do Âź ĂŁ nĂŁ sÏ dĂŻng
vĂ­i trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to do.
VÝ dî:
There are only twenty-eight days in February, aren’t there?
It’s raining now, isn’t it? It isn’t raining now, is it?
The boys don’t have class tomorrow, do they?
You and I talked with the professor yesterday, didn’t we?
You won’t be leaving for another hour, will you?
Jill and Joe have been to Mexico, haven’t they?
You have two children, don’t you?
(Trong tiÕng Anh, th × sÏ dïng haven’t you?)
L u Ăœ:
Trong cžc b”i thi TOEFL nÕu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” chÝnh l” have th × Âź »ng sau ph¶i dĂŻng trĂź
Âź Ă©ng tĂ” do.
VÝ dî:
She has an exam tomorrow, doesn’t she?
9. LĂši n ĂŁi p hĂŽ hoÂč khÂŒng ¼Þnh v ” p h ñ ¼Þnh.
9.1 L Ăši nĂŁi p h ĂŽ h oÂč k h ÂŒ n g Âź Þ n h.
- DĂŻng ¼Ó phĂŽ hoÂč lÂči Ăœ khÂŒng ¼Þnh cña mĂ©t ng ĂȘi khžc tÂŹ ng Âź ÂŹ ng vĂ­i c ©u tiÕng
viÖt “ cĂČng thÕ ” v” ngĂȘi ta sÏ dĂŻng so v” too trong cÊu trĂłc n”y.
- §éng tĂ” to be Âź Ăźc phÐp dĂŻng trĂčc tiÕp, cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” thĂȘng dĂŻng vĂ­i trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to
do, cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thĂȘi kÐp (future, perfect, progressive) dĂŻng vĂ­i chÝnh Âź Ă©ng tĂ”
cña nã.
- Khi be Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng trong mÖnh ¼Ò chÝnh th × thĂȘi cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” be sö dĂŽng
trong c ©u phĂŽ hoÂč cĂČng ph¶i cĂŻng thĂȘi vĂ­i be Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò chÝnh.
Subject + verb(be)
+ too
Affirmative statement (be) + and +
So + verb(be) +
subject
VÝ dî:
I am happy, and you are too.
I am happy, and so are you.
- Khi mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thÓ kÐp (auxilary + verb), vÝ dĂŽ, will go, should do, has
done, have written, must examine, vv... xuÊt hiÖn trong mÖnh ¼Ò chÝnh th × trü
Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cña mÖnh ¼Ò chÝnh Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng Ă« dÂčng khÂŒng ¼Þnh, v” chñ ng Ă· v”
Ÿ éng tÔ ph¶i ho” hßp.
Subject + auxiliary only +
too
Affirmative statement + and +
( Ÿéng tĂ” Ă« thÓ kÐp) So + auxiliary
only + subject
VÝ dî:
They will work in the lab tomorrow, and you will too.
They will work in the lab tomorrow, and so will you.
Subject + d o, does, or did +
too.
Affirmative statement + and +
( Ÿéng tÔ Ÿ  n trÔ be) So + do, does, or did
+ subject
VÝ dî:
Jane goes to that school, and my sister does too.
Jane goes to that school, and so does my sister.
John went to the mountains on his vacation, and we did too.
John went to the mountains on his vacation, and so did we.
I will be in New Mexico in August, and they will too.
I will be in New Mexico in August, and so will they.
He has seen her plays, and the girls have too.
He has seen her plays, and so have the girls.
We are going to the movies tonight, and Suzy is too.
We are going to the movies tonight, and so is Suzy.
She will wear a costume to the party, and we will too.
She will wear a costume to the party, and so will we.
9. 2 L Ăši nĂŁi p h ĂŽ h oÂč p h ñ Âź Þ n h
- DĂŻng ¼Ó phĂŽ hoÂč lÂči Ăœ phñ ¼Þnh cña ngĂȘi khžc, tÂŹ ng Ăžng vĂ­i c ©u tiÕng viÖt “
cĂČng kh«ng”.
- CÊu trĂłc dĂŻng cho loÂči c ©u n”y l” either v” neither.
NÂȘn nhĂ­ r»ng: Not ... either / Neither ... positive verb.
Cžc trĂȘng hĂźp dĂŻng giĂšng hÖt c«ng thĂžc khÂŒng ¼Þnh.
Subject + negative auxiliary or be +
either .
Negative statement + and +
Neither + positive auxiliary or
be + subject.
VÝ dî:
I didn’t see Mary this morning. John didn’t see Mary this morning.
I didn’t see Mary this morning, and John didn’t either.
I didn’t see Mary this morning, and neither did John.
She won’t be going to the conference. Her colleagues won’t be going to the
conference.
She won’t be going to the conference, and her colleagues won’t either.
She won’t be going to the conference, and neither will her colleagues.
John hasn’t seen the new movie yet. I haven’t seen the new movie yet.
John hasn’t seen the new movie yet, and I haven’t ether.
John hasn’t seen the new movie yet, and neither have I.
10. C©u p h ñ ¼Þnh
§Ó th”nh lËp c ©u phñ ¼Þnh ngĂȘi ta ¼Æt not v”o sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be, trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ”
to do cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” thĂȘng, v” cžc trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thĂȘi kÐp.
- §Æt any Âź »ng trĂ­c danh tĂ” ¼Ó nhÊn mÂčnh cho phñ ¼Þnh.
- Trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp ¼Ó nhÊn mÂčnh cho danh tĂ” Âź »ng sau bÞ phñ ¼Þnh, ng ĂȘi
ta ¼Ó Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« nguyÂȘn thÓ v” ¼Æt no trĂ­c danh tĂ”. ( no = not at all).
Nagative + nagative = Positive
VÝ dî:
It’s really unbelievable that he has no money.
Nagative + comparative = Superlative
VÝ dî:
Professor Baker couldn’t be more helpful = Pr. Baker was the most helpful.
We couldn’t have gone to the beach on a better day. TĂžc l”: Today is the best day
to go to the beach.
Nagative ..., much less + noun.
(kh«ng m” lÂči c”ng kh«ng)
VÝ dî:
He didn’t like to read novels, much less text books.
It’s really unbelievable how he could have survived, after such a free fall, much
less live to tell about it on TV.
MĂ©t sĂš phĂŁ tĂ” trong tiÕng Anh mang nghÜa phñ ¼Þnh, khi Âź · dĂŻng nĂŁ trong c ©u
tuyÖt Âź Ăši kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng phñ ¼Þnh cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” n Ă·a.
VÝ dî:
Hardly
Scarcely HÇu nh kh«ng ( Almost no)
Barely
Hardly ever
Rarely HÇu nh kh«ng bao giĂȘ ( almost never).
Seldom
C«ng thĂžc dĂŻng vĂ­i cžc phĂŁ tĂ” trÂȘn.
Subject + nagative + adverb +
positive verb
Lu Ăœ: Barely v” scarcely Âź «i khi mang nghÜa vĂ”a Âź ñ, vĂ”a soÂčn (just enough).
Ph¶i cšn cĂž theo ng Ă· c¶nh cña c ©u hoÆc cžc c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi d Ă­i phÇn nghe ¼Ó t × m
ra nghÜa ¼ óng.
VÝ dî:
He scarcely has money for the tuition fee and not any coins left.
(NĂŁ vĂ”a Âź ñ tiÒn ¼Ó tr¶ hĂ€c phÝ v” kh«ng cßn xu n”o c¶.)
11. MÖnh lÖnh thþc
Chia l”m 2 loÂči trĂčc tiÕp v” gižn tiÕp.
1 1. 1 M Ö n h lÖn h t h Ăžc tr Ăčc ti Õ p.
MÖnh lÖnh thĂžc trĂčc tiÕp l” c ©u m” mĂ©t ngĂȘi ra lÖnh cho mĂ©t ngĂȘi khžc l”m
viÖc g × Âź ĂŁ. NĂŁ cĂŁ thÓ cĂŁ please Âź i trĂ­c. Chñ ng Ă· Âź Ăźc hiÓu l” you. Sö dĂŽng dÂčng
Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” (NguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to).
VÝ dî:
Close the door. Open the window.
Leave the room. Pay your rent.
Please turn off the light. Be quiet.
DÂčng mÖnh lÖnh thĂžc phñ ¼Þnh Âź Ăźc th”nh lËp nhĂȘ cĂ©ng thÂȘm don’t trĂ­c Âź Ă©ng tĂ”.
Don’t close the door.
Please don’t turn off the light.
Don’t open the window, please.
( Please cĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng ¼Çu hoÆc cuĂši c ©u mÖnh lÖnh thĂžc l”m cho c ©u trĂ« nÂȘn
lÞch sĂč h ÂŹn).
1 1. 2 M Ö n h lÖn h t h þc gi¾n ti Õ p.
ThĂȘng dĂŻng vĂ­i 4 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau:
to order
to ask
to tell
to say
VÝ dî:
John told Mary to close the door.
Jack asked Jill to turn off the light.
The teacher told Christopher to open the window.
Please tell Jaime to leave the room.
John ordered Bill to close his book.
The policeman ordered the suspect to be quiet.
Lu Ăœ:
§u«i cña Let’s ...., shall we.
VÝ dî:
Let’s go out for lunch, shall we?
Khžc vĂ­i let us trong c ©u mÖnh lÖnh thĂžc.
VÝ dî:
Let’s go now (chĂłng ta Âź i th«i) khžc vĂ­i Let us go, please. ( xin h·y ¼Ó cho chĂłng
t«i Ÿ i)
to do something.
not to do somethingsmb
12. §éng tĂ” khiÕ m khuy Õt.
SĂ« dÜ gĂ€i l” nh vËy v × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” n”y mang nh Ă·ng ¼Æc tÝnh nh sau:
- Kh«ng cĂŁ tiÓu tĂ” to Âź »ng trĂ­c.
- §éng tĂ” n”o Âź i sau nĂŁ cĂČng ph¶i bĂĄ to.
- Kh«ng bao giĂȘ 2 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khiÕm khuyÕt Âź i cĂŻng vĂ­i nhau, nÕu cĂŁ th × bŸt buĂ©c
Âź Ă©ng tĂ” thĂž 2 ph¶i chuyÓn sang mĂ©t dÂčng khžc.
VÝ dî:
Will have to
must
Will be able to
can
Will be allowed to
may
§éng tĂ” khiÕm khuyÕt Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng vĂ­i cžc chĂžc nšng sau:
1 2. 1 Di Ôn Âź Âč t t h ĂȘi t ÂŹ n g lai.
12.2 Di Ôn Âź Âč t c © u Âź i Ò u ki Ön.
12.2.1 §iÒu kiÖn cĂŁ thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči.
Will/shall
If + Subject + simple present + subject + +
[verb in simple form]
can/ may
VÝ dî:
If I have the money, I will buy a new car.
If you try more, you will improve your English.
We will have plenty of time to finish the project before dinner if it is only ten
o’clock now.
If + subject + simple present tense + subject + ... +
simple present tense
MÉu c ©u n”y cßn Âź Ăźc dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn t¶ mĂ©t thĂŁi quen.
VÝ dî:
If the doctor has morning office hours, he visits his patients in the hospital in the
afternoon (kh«ng cĂŁ Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khuyÕt thiÕu.)
John usually walks to school if he has enough time.
If + Subject + simple present tense ... + command
form* ...
* NÂȘn nhĂ­ r»ng mÖnh lÖnh thĂžc Ă« dÂčng Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. ( simple form)
MÉu c ©u trÂȘn cĂŁ nghÜa l” nhĂȘ ai, ra lÖnh cho ai l”m g ×.
VÝ dî:
If you go to the Post Office, please mail this letter for me.
Please call me if you hear from Jane.
12.2.2 §iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči.
Would/should
If + Subject + simple past + subject + + verb
in simple form
could/ might
VÝ dî:
If I had enough money now, I would buy this house
( but now I don’t have enough money.)
If I had the time, I would go to the beach with you this weekend.
(but I don’t have the time.) ( I’m not going to the beach with you.)
He would tell you about it if he were here.
( he won’t tell you about it.) ( He is not here).
If he didn’t speak so quickly, you could understand him.
(He speaks very quickly.) (You can’t understand him.)
Lu Ăœ:
§éng tĂ” to be sau if Ă« mÉu c ©u n”y ph¶i chia l”m were Ă« tÊt c¶ cžc ng«i.
I... they were.
VÝ dî:
If I were you, I wouldn’t do such a thing.
(but I’m not you.)
12.2.3 §iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi quž khĂž.
Would/should
If + Subject + past perfect + subject + +
have + P2
could / might
VÝ dî:
If we hadn’t lost the way we could have been here in time.
(but in fact we lost the way, so we were late.)
If we had known that you were there, we would have written you a letter.
(We didn’t know that you were there.) ( we didn’t write you a letter.)
She would have sold the house if she had found the right buyer.
(She didn’t sell the house.) (She didn’t find the right buyer.)
If we hadn’t lost the way, we would have arrived sooner.
(We lost our way.) (we didn’t arrive early.)
C©u Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng ph¶i lĂłc n”o cĂČng tu ©n theo Âź Ăłng c«ng thĂžc trÂȘn, trong
mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp 1 vÕ cña c ©u Âź iÒu kiÖn Ă« quž khĂž cßn mĂ©t vÕ lÂči Ă« hiÖn tÂči do
thĂȘi gian cña tĂ”ng mÖnh ¼Ò quy ¼Þnh.
VÝ dî:
If she had caught the flight she would be here by now.
Lu Ăœ:
Trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp Ă« c ©u Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi
quž khĂž, ngĂȘi ta bĂĄ if Âź i v” Âź ¶o had lÂȘn ¼Çu c ©u nhng Ăœ nghÜa vÉn gi Ă· nguyÂȘn.
Had + subject + [verb in past participle ]...
VÝ dî:
Had we known you were there, we would have written you a letter.
Had she found the right buyer, she would have sold the house.
Hadn’t we lost the way, we would have arrived sooner.
12.2.4 Cžc cžch dĂŻng ¼Æc biÖt cña Will, would v” sould trong cžc
mÖnh ¼Ò if
‱ Th«ng thĂȘng nh Ă·ng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” n”y kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng Âź »ng sau if nhng nÕu Âź Ăźc
dĂŻng nĂŁ sÏ mang Ăœ nghÜa sau:
If you will /would.
ThĂȘng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng trong cžc yÂȘu cÇu lÞch sĂč ( Would lÞch sĂč h ÂŹn)
VÝ dî:
If you would wait a moment, I will see if Mr John is here.
(NÕu c« vui lßng chĂȘ mĂ©t chĂłt, t«i sÏ xem liÖu «ng John cĂŁ Ă« Âź © y kh«ng.)
I would be very grateful if you will/ would make an arrangement for me.
If you could + verb in simple form.
NÕu «ng vui lßng - Ngßi nĂŁi cho r»ng ngĂȘi kia sÏ Âź Ă„ng Ăœ nh mĂ©t
lÏ tÊt nhiÂȘn
VÝ dî:
If you could fill in this form.
If you could open your books.
If + subject + will / would.
NÕu ... chÞu - DiÔn Âź Âčt Ăœ tĂč nguyÖn
VÝ dî:
If he will (would) listen to me, I can help him.
NÕu nĂŁ chÞu nghe theo lĂȘi t«i th × t«i cĂŁ thÓ giĂłp nĂŁ.
If + subject + will.
DiÔn t¶ sĂč ngoan cĂš.
VÝ dî:
If you will learn English this way, a failure for TOFEL test is sure awaiting you.
NÕu cËu m” cĂž hĂ€c tiÕng Anh theo cžch n”y th × tr Ăźt kĂș thi TOFEL chŸc chŸn
Âź ang chĂȘ Âź ĂŁn cËu.
If + subject +should.
DiÔn Âź Âčt mĂ©t h”nh Âź Ă©ng dĂŻ rÊt cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc song kh¶ nšng rÊt Ýt v” khi nĂŁi ngĂȘi
nĂŁi kh«ng tin l” sĂč viÖc lÂči cĂŁ thÓ x¶y ra.
VÝ dî:
If you shouldn’t know how to use this TV set, please call me up this number.
NÕu anh kh«ng biÕt cžch sö dĂŽng chiÕc tivi n”y, h·y gĂ€i Âź iÖn cho t«i sĂš m žy n”y.
(NĂŁi vËy nhng ngĂȘi nĂŁi kh«ng cho r»ng l” anh ta lÂči kh«ng biÕt sö dĂŽng chiÕc tivi
Âź ĂŁ.)
If you should have any difficulties while doing these exercises, please feel free to
ask me.
(NgĂȘi thÇy kh«ng cho r»ng cËu hĂ€c sinh lÂči kh«ng l”m Âź Ăźc nh Ă·ng b”i tËp Âź ĂŁ -
v × chĂłng rÊt dÔ hoÆc cËu hĂ€c trß rÊt th«ng minh)
- Trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp ngĂȘi ta bĂĄ if Âź i v” Âź ¶o should lÂȘn ¼Çu c ©u m” ng Ă·
nghÜa kh«ng thay Âź ĂŠi.
VÝ dî:
Should you have any difficulties while doing these exercises, please feel free to
ask me.
Should it be cloudy and gray, the groundhog will supposedly wander around for
food - a sign that spring is near.
NÕu trĂȘi cĂŁ nhiÒu m © y v” bÇu trĂȘi xžm xÞt th × ngĂȘi ta cho l” con sĂŁc ¼Êt sÏ Âź i
lang thang kiÕm šn - Âź ĂŁ l” dÊu hiÖu cña mĂŻa Xu ©n Âź ang tĂ­i gÇn. ThĂčc ra, khi sö
dĂŽng cÊu trĂłc n”y th × tžc gi¶ cho r»ng khi con sĂŁc ¼Êt chui ra th × rÊt hiÕm khi
trĂȘi lÂči cĂŁ nhiÒu m © y v” bÇu trĂȘi lÂči xžm lÂči - cĂŁ thÓ l” do kÕt qu¶ thĂšng kÂȘ.
13. Cžch sö dÎn g th”nh n g ÷ a s if, a s thou gh.
(CĂŁ nghÜa l” : dĂȘng nh l”, nh thÓ l”)
- MÖnh ¼Ò Âź »ng sau 2 th”nh ng Ă· n”y thĂȘng hay Ă« dÂčng Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ
thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc v” chia l”m 2 thĂȘi:
1 3. 1 Th ĂȘi hi Ö n tÂči
NÕu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò trĂ­c chia Ă« simple present th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò sau
ph¶i chia Ă« simple past, Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be sÏ ph¶i chia Ă« l” were Ă« tÊt c¶ cžc ng«i.
as if
Subject + verb (simple present) + + subject + verb
(simple past)
as though
VÝ dî:
The old lady dresses as if it were winter even in the summer.
HiÖn tÂči quž khĂž
(It is not winter.)
Angelique walks as though she studied modelling.
HiÖn tÂči quž khĂž
(She didn’t study modelling)
He acts as though he were rich.
HiÖn tÂči quž khĂž
(He is not rich)
1 3. 2 Th ĂȘi q už k h Ăž.
NÕu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò trĂ­c chia Ă« simple past th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò 2 ph¶i
chia Ă« past perfect.
Subject + verb (simple past) + + subject + verb
(past perfect)
as if
as
though
VÝ dî:
Betty talked about the contest as if she had won the grand prize.
Past simple past perfect
(She didn’t win the grand prize.)
Jeff looked as if he had seen a ghost.
Past simple past perfect
(She didn’t see a ghost.)
He looked as though he had run ten miles.
Past simple past perfect
(He didn’t run ten miles.)
‱ C¶ 2 dÂčng chia Âź ĂŁ sau as if ¼Òu diÔn Âź Âčt Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź -
Ăźc.
L u Ăœ:
Trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp nÕu Âź iÒu kiÖn l” cĂŁ thËt th × 2 c«ng thĂžc trÂȘn kh«ng Âź Ăźc
tu ©n theo. §éng tĂ” lÂči trĂ« vÒ dÂčng b ×nh thĂȘng theo diÔn biÕn cña c ©u.
VÝ dî:
He looks as if he has finish the test.
14. Cžch sö dÎn g Ÿ é n g tÔ To ho p e v ” to wish.
Hai Âź Ă©ng tĂ” n”y tuy Âź Ă„ng nghÜa nhng khžc nhau vÒ mÆt ng Ă· phžp.
+ §»ng sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to hope l” mĂ©t c ©u diÔn biÕn b ×nh thĂȘng.
VÝ dî:
I hope that they will come. ( I don’t know if they are coming.)
( T«i hy vĂ€ng l” hĂ€ sÏ tĂ­i.)
We hope that they came yesterday. ( We don’t know if they came.)
+ Nhng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to wish lÂči ¼ßi hĂĄi Âź »ng sau nĂŁ ph¶i l” mĂ©t Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng
thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc. §iÒu kiÖn n”y chia l”m 3 thĂȘi.
1 4. 1 Th ĂȘi t ÂŹ n g lai.
§éng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò sau sÏ ph¶i l” Would / could + verb hoÆc were + Ving.
Could + verb
Subject + wish + (that) + Subject* + would +
verb + ...
were + Ving
Subject* : cĂŁ thÓ l” cĂŻng hoÆc khžc chñ ng Ă· vĂ­i chñ ng Ă· trong mÖnh ¼Ò chÝnh.
VÝ dî:
We wish that you could come to the party tonight. (You can’t come.)
I wish that you would stop saying that. (You probably won’t stop.)
She wish that she were coming with us. ( She is not coming with us.)
1 4. 2 Th ĂȘi hi Ö n tÂči
§éng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò 2 sÏ chia Ă« simple past. §éng tĂ” to be ph¶i chia l”m were Ă«
tÊt c¶ cžc ng«i.
Subject + wish + (that) + Subject* + verb in simple past ...
VÝ dî:
I wish that I had enough time to finish my homework. ( I don’t have enough time.)
We wish that he were old enough to come with us. ( He is not old enough.)
They wish that they didn’t have to go to class today. ( They have to go to class.)
1 4. 3 Th ĂȘi q už k h Ăž.
§éng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò sau sÏ ph¶i chia Ă« Past perfect hoÆc Could have + P2
Past perfect
Subject + wish + (that) + Subject +
Could have + P2
VÝ dî:
I wish that I had washed the clothes yesterday. ( I didn’t wash the clothes
yesterday.)
She wish that she could have been there. ( She couldn’t be there.)
We wish that we had had more time last night. ( We didn’t have more time.)
L u Ăœ:
§éng tĂ” wish chØ cĂŁ thÓ ¶nh hĂ«ng ¼Õn mÖnh ¼Ò Âź »ng sau nĂŁ b»ng cžch
buĂ©c mÖnh ¼Ò Âź ĂŁ ph¶i Ă« Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc. Nhng Âź iÒu kiÖn
Âź ĂŁ Ă« thĂȘi n”o lÂči do thĂȘi gian cña mÖnh ¼Ò Âź ĂŁ quyÕt ¼Þnh kh«ng hÒ phĂŽ thuĂ©c
v”o thĂȘi cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to wish.
VÝ dî:
He wished that he could come to the party next week.
Quž khĂž §iÒu kiÖn Ă« tÂŹng lai TÂŹng lai
PhĂŻ hĂźp vÒ thĂȘi
The photographer wished that we stood closer together than we are standing
now.
Quž khĂž ÂźiÒu kiÖn Ă« hiÖn tÂči hiÖn tÂči
PhĂŻ hĂźp vÒ thĂȘi
- Ph¶i ph ©n biÖt vĂ­i to wish Ă« dÂčng c ©u n”y vĂ­i nghÜa Ă­c g ×, mong g × vĂ­i
to wish trong mÉu c ©u sau:
To wish somebody something
VÝ dî:
I wish you a happy birthday.
15. Cžch sö dÎn g th”nh n g ÷ us e d to v ” g et/b e us e d to
15.1 u s e d t o.
Used to + [Verb in simple form]... ( ThĂȘng hay, Âź · tĂ”ng)
ChØ mĂ©t thĂŁi quen, h”nh Âź Ă©ng thĂȘng xuyÂȘn x¶y ra lÆp Âź i lÆp lÂči trong quž khĂž.
VÝ dî:
When David was young, he used to swim once a day. ( Thãi quen trong quž khÞ)
Ch u y Ó n sa n g c © u n g hi v Ê n:
Did + Subject + use to + Verb
= Used + Subject + to + verb.
VÝ dî:
When David was young, did he use to swim once a day?
used he to swim once a day?
C © u p h ñ Âź Þ n h :
Subject + didn’t + use to + Verb
= Subject + used not to + verb.
VÝ dî:
When David was young, he didn’t use to swim once a day.
he used not to swim once a day.
(*)
1 5. 2 g e t / b e u s e d t o.
BE / GET USED TO + VING
( trĂ« nÂȘn quen vĂ­i) (noun)
Lu Ăœ: Trong c«ng thĂžc (*) cĂŁ thÓ thay used to = Would nhng dÔ nhÇm lÉn.
16. Cžch sö dÎn g th”nh n g ÷ Would rath er
Would rather ... than = Prefer ... to
(ThÝch ... h ÂŹn l”; th” ... h ÂŹn l”)
− §»ng sau would rather ph¶i l” mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to (bare infinitive)
nhng Ÿ »ng sau prefer ph¶i l” mét verb +ing.
VÝ dî:
John would rather drink Coca-Cola than orange juice.
John prefer drinking Coca-Cola to drinking orange juice.
L u Ăœ:
− ViÖc sö dĂŽng th”nh ng Ă· n”y cßn tuĂș thuĂ©c v”o sĂš chñ ng Ă· v” nghÜa cña c ©u
1 6. 1 L oÂči c © u cĂŁ m Ă© t c hñ n g Ă· .
Ă« loÂči c ©u n”y chØ dĂŻng Would rather (kh«ng cĂŁ than) v” chia l”m 2 thĂȘi :
1. Th ĂȘi hi Ö n tÂči.
§éng tĂ” sau Would rather l” nguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to. NÕu muĂšn dĂŻng phñ ¼Þnh ¼Æt
not trĂ­c Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to ( c«ng thĂžc 1)
Subject + Would rather + (not) bare infinitive
VÝ dî:
Jim would rather go to class tomorrow
Trong c ©u n”y ngĂȘi nĂŁi muĂšn nĂŁi Jim thÝch ¼Õn lĂ­p v”o ng”y mai (chĂž h«m nay
Jim kh«ng muÚn)
2. Th ĂȘi q už k h Ăž.
Ă« thĂȘi quž khĂž sau would rather l” have + past participle (hay cßn gĂ€i l” ph ©n tĂ”
2 - P2) - C«ng thÞc 2.
Subject + would rather + have + (P2)
(1)
(2)
VÝ dî:
John would rather have gone to class yesterday than today ( John thÝch Âź i hĂ€c
v”o ng”y h«m qua h n ng”y h«m nay).
1 6. 2 L oÂči c © u cĂŁ 2 c hñ n g Ă·
Ă« loÂči c ©u n”y th”nh ng Ă· Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng sÏ l” Would rather that (Ă­c g ×, mong
g ×) v” chia l”m nh Ă·ng mÉu c ©u nh sau:
1. C © u gi¶ Âź Þ n h
L” loÂči c ©u diÔn Âź Âčt Ăœ ngĂȘi thĂž nhÊt muĂšn ngĂȘi thĂž 2 l”m mĂ©t viÖc g × Âź ĂŁ,
nhng l”m hay kh«ng cßn tuĂș thuĂ©c v”o v”o phÝa ngĂȘi thĂž 2. Do vËy cÊu trĂłc
Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau chñ ng Ă· 2 ph¶i l” nguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to - C«ng thĂžc 1.
Subject1 + Would rather that + Subject2 + bare
infinitive
VÝ dî:
I would rather that Jones call me tomorrow ( T«i muĂšn Johnes gĂ€i Âź iÖn cho t«i
v”o ng”y mai - Nhng Jones cĂŁ gĂ€i Âź iÖn cho ngĂȘi nĂŁi hay kh«ng cßn tuĂș v”o
Jones).
We would rather that he take this train. (§žp chuyÕn t”u Âź ĂŁ hay kh«ng cßn tuĂș
v”o anh Êy - HĂ€ chØ muĂšn vËy).
2. §iÒu ki Ö n k h«n g t h Ăčc hi Ö n Âź Ăźc Ă« hi Ö n tÂči (n g hÜa cña c © u trži vĂ­i t h Ăčc
t Õ).
§éng tĂ” sau chñ ng Ă· 2 sÏ chia Ă« Simple past, Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be sÏ ph¶i Âź Ăźc chia th”nh
Were Ă« tÊt c¶ cžc ng«i - C«ng thĂžc 2
Subject1 + would rather that + Subject2 + Simple past...
VÝ dî:
Henry would rather that his girlfriend worked in the same department as he does
(In fact his girlfriend doesn’t work in the same department.)
Jane would rather that it were winter now.
(It is not winter now.)
NhËn xÐt:
- Trong cžc c ©u trÂȘn nghÜa cña vÕ thĂž 2 lu«n trži vĂ­i thĂčc tÕ Ă« thĂȘi Âź iÓm hiÖn tÂči.
- NÕu muĂšn th”nh lËp thÓ phñ ¼Þnh dĂŻng
(1)
Did not + verb
Were not + verb
(2)
3. §iÒu ki Ö n k h«n g t h Ó t h Ăčc hi Ö n Âź Ăźc tr o n g q už k h Ăž ( N g hÜa cña c © u l”
trži vĂ­i t h Ăčc t Õ.)
Trong loÂči c ©u n”y Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò thĂž 2 sÏ ph¶i Âź Ăźc chia Ă« Past
perfect - C«ng thÞc 1.
Subject1 + would rather that + Subject2 + Past perfect
VÝ dî:
Jim would rather that Jill had gone to class yesterday.
(nhng trong thĂčc tÕ th × Jill Âź · kh«ng tĂ­i lĂ­p ng”y h«m qua v” ng ĂȘi nĂŁi chØ lÊy l”m
tiÔc l” Jill Âź · kh«ng tĂ­i lĂ­p v”o ng”y h«m qua.)
N h Ë n xÐt : TrÂȘn thĂčc tÕ nghÜa cña to wish v” would rather that (vĂ­i nghÜa Ă­c,
mong muĂšn) trong trĂȘng hĂźp trÂȘn l” giĂšng nhau nhng Wish Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng trong
tiÕng Anh b ×nh d ©n (h”ng ng”y). Cßn Would rather that mang kÞch tÝnh nhiÒu
h ÂŹn.
17. Cžch sö dÎn g Would Like
Th”nh ng Ă· n”y dĂŻng ¼Ó mĂȘi mĂ€c ngĂȘi khžc mĂ©t cžch lÞch sĂč hoÆc diÔn
Âź Âčt mong muĂšn cña m ×nh mĂ©t cžch nh· nhÆn sau Âź ĂŁ ph¶i l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn
thÓ cã to (infinitive).
Subject + would like + [to + verb] ...
VÝ dî:
Would you like to dance with me?
I would like to visit Hongkong.
We would like to order now, please.
The president would like to be re-elected.
They would like to study at the university.
Would you like to see a movie tonight?
L u Ăœ :
- NÕu h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź Ăźc xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ vÒ mÆt thĂȘi gian hoÆc thĂȘi gian
l” hiÖn tÂči th × dĂŻng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ sau like.
- Nhng nÕu thĂȘi gian l” kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh th × ph¶i dĂŻng Verb +ing.
VÝ dî:
Would you like a lemonade now? (thĂȘi gian l” hiÖn tÂči now)
She likes watching TV every night. (thĂȘi gian l” kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh - chØ sĂ« thÝch
hobby)
HoÆc I would like eating a steak and salad.
(1)
18. Cžch sö dĂŽn g c žc Âź Ă© n g tĂ” khiÕ m khuy Õt Âź Ó diÔn ÂźÂčt c žc
trÂčng th ži Ă« hiÖn tÂči.
18.1 Co uld/ may/ mi g h t.
Could/may/might + [Verb in simple form]
Cã thÓ /cã lÏ.
ChØ mĂ©t kh¶ nšng cĂŁ thÓ x¶y ra Ă« hiÖn tÂči song ng ĂȘi nĂŁi kh«ng chŸc. C¶ 3
Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cĂŁ giž trÞ nh nhau.
VÝ dî:
It might rain tomorrow It will possibly rain tomorrow
It may rain tomorrow = OR
It could rain tomorrow Maybe it will rain tomorrow
Ch Ăł Ăœ:
Maybe l” sĂč kÕt hĂźp cña may v” be, nhng nĂŁ l” mĂ©t tĂ” v” kh«ng ph¶i l” trĂź Âź Ă©ng
tĂ”. NĂŁ Âź Ă„ng nghÜa vĂ­i perhaps.
MĂ©t s Ăš vÝ d ĂŽ v Ò Co uld, m ay, v ” m i g h t :
The president said that there might be a strike next month.
I don’t know what I’m doing tomorrow. I may go to the beach or I may stay home.
(Lu Ăœ l” ngĂȘi Anh thĂȘng nĂŁi l” stay at home nhng ngĂȘi MĂŒ lÂči nĂŁi l” stay home.)
It might be warmer tomorrow.
I may not be able to go with you tonight.
I don’t know where Jaime is. He could be at home.
1 8. 2 S h o uld
Should + [Verb in simple form]
NghÜa l” :
- NÂȘn ( diÔn Âź Âčt mĂ©t lĂȘi khuyÂȘn, ¼Ò nghÞ hoÆc bŸt buĂ©c nhng kh«ng mÂčnh lŸm)
- CĂŁ khi - dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt mong muĂšn Âź iÒu g × x¶y ra.
VÝ dî:
It should rain tomorrow ( I expect it to rain tomorrow)
My check should arrive next week. ( I expect it to arrive next week).
L u Ăœ:
- Had better, ought to, be supposed to nĂŁi chung l” Âź Ă„ng nghÜa vĂ­i should vĂ­i
Âź iÒu kiÖn l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be ph¶i chia Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči.
- be supposed to ngo”i nghÜa tÂŹ ng Âź ÂŹ ng vĂ­i should cßn mang nghÜa quy ¼Þnh
ph¶i, bŸt buĂ©c ph¶i.
VÝ dî:
We are supposed to have a math test this afternoon, but it was postponed
because the Professor had to attend a science conference.
( Theo quy ¼Þnh l” ....)
1 8. 3 M u s t
Must + [verb in simple form]
NghÜa l” :
- Ph¶i - bŸt buĂ©c rÊt mÂčnh (ngĂȘi bÞ bŸt buĂ©c kh«ng cĂŁ sĂč lĂča chĂ€n n”o
khžc)
VÝ dî:
One must endorse a check before one cashes it. (ngĂȘi ta ph¶i kĂœ sau tÊm
sÐc tríc khi rót tiÒn).
George must call his insurance agent today.
A pharmacist must keep a record of the prescriptions that are filled.
An automobile must have gasoline to run.
An attorney must pass an examination before practising law.
This freezer must be kept at -200
.
- HÂŒn l” - diÔn Âź Âčt mĂ©t sĂč suy luËn cĂŁ logic dĂča trÂȘn nh Ă·ng hiÖn t Ăźng cĂŁ
thËt Ă« hiÖn tÂči.
VÝ dî:
John’s lights are out. He must be asleep.
(We assume that John is asleep because the lights are out.)
The grass is wet. It must be raining.
(We assume that it is raining because the grass is wet.)
‱ Must Âź Ăźc thay thÕ b»ng have to trong nh Ă·ng trĂȘng hĂźp sau Âź © y
- §Þng sau Will Ă« thĂȘi tÂŹ ng lai.
VÝ dî:
We will have to take a TOEFL test at the end of this year.
- Had to thay cho must ë quž khÞ.
VÝ dî:
The teacher had to attend a science conference yesterday.
‱ Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči have to Âź Ăźc thay thÕ cho must khi:
HĂĄi xem m ×nh cĂŁ bÞ buĂ©c ph¶i l”m Âź iÒu g × kh«ng hoÆc diÔn Âź Âčt sĂč bŸt
buĂ©c do khžch quan mang lÂči ¼Ó l”m gi¶m nhÑ tÝnh bŸt buĂ©c cña must.
VÝ dî:
Q : Do I have to leave a deposit?
A : No, you needn’t but you have to sign in this register, I’m sorry but
that’s the rule.
19. Cžch sö dĂŽn g c žc Âź Ă© n g tĂ” khiÕ m khuy Õt Âź Ó diÕn ÂźÂčt c žc
trÂčng th ži Ă« th ĂȘi q u ž khĂž.
Could/ May/ might + have +P2 (cĂŁ lÏ Âź ·)
ChØ mĂ©t kh¶ nšng Ă« quž khĂž song ngĂȘi nĂŁi kh«ng džm chŸc.
VÝ dî:
It might have rained last night, but I’m not sure.
(CĂŁ lÏ Âź ÂȘ m qua trĂȘi m a)
The cause of death could have been bacteria.
(NguyÂȘn nh ©n cña cži chÕt cĂŁ lÏ l” do vi trĂŻng)
John might have gone to the movies yesterday.
(CĂŁ lÏ John Âź · tĂ­i rÂčp chiÕu bĂŁng ng”y h«m qua)
Could + have +P2 (cĂŁ lÏ Âź · cĂŁ thÓ - nhng thĂčc tÕ th ×
kh«ng)
VÝ dî:
We could have solved this problem at that time (But we couldn’t in fact)
(LÏ ra lĂłc Âź ĂŁ chĂłng t«i Âź · cĂŁ thÓ gi¶i quyÕt Âź Ăźc vÊn ¼Ò n”y.)
SHOULD + HAVE + P2 (lÏ ra ph¶i, lÏ ra nÂȘn - nhng thĂčc tÕ th ×
kh«ng)
Th”nh ng ÷ n”y t ng Ÿ  ng víi Was / were / Supposed to.
MUST HAVE P2 - HÂŒn l” Âź ·
(ChØ sĂč suy luËn logic dĂča trÂȘn nh Ă·ng hiÖn t Ăźng cĂŁ thËt trong
quž khÞ)
VÝ dî:
Paul did so well in his speech today that he could have rehearsed it many times
this past week.
(H«m nay Paul Âź · cĂŁ lĂȘi phžt biÓu rÊt hay, hÂŒn l” tuÇn qua nĂŁ Âź · diÔn tËp rÊt
nhiÒu lÇn ).
MIGHT HAVE BEEN VERB+ ING - cã lÏ lóc Êy ¼ ang
(ChØ sĂč suy luËn logic dĂča trÂȘn nh Ă·ng hiÖn t Ăźng cĂŁ thËt trong
quž khÞ)
VÝ dî:
I didn’t hear the telephone ring, I might have been sleeping at that time.
I didn’t watch that scene on television, I might have been paying attention to the
argument.
MUST HAVE BEEN VERB+ ING - chŸc hÂŒn lĂłc Êy Âź ang
(ChØ sĂč suy luËn logic dĂča trÂȘn nh Ă·ng hiÖn t Ăźng cĂŁ thËt trong
quž khÞ)
VÝ dî:
I didn’t hear you knock, I must have been sleeping at that time.
I didn’t see him this morning, he must have been working in the office.
20. tÝnh tĂ” v ” p h ĂŁ tĂ” (adjectiv e a n d a d v erb).
‱ MĂ©t tÝnh tĂ” bao giĂȘ cĂČng bĂŠ nghÜa cho mĂ©t danh tĂ” v” chØ danh tĂ”.
NĂŁ ŸÞng ngay trĂ­c danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ. Trong tiÕng Anh chØ cĂŁ mĂ©t danh tĂ”
duy nhÊt ŸÞng sau danh tĂ” m” nĂŁ bĂŠ nghÜa Âź ĂŁ l”: galore ( nhiÒu,
phong phó, dÄi d”o).
VÝ dî:
There are errors galore in the final exam.
- MĂ©t phĂŁ tĂ” bao giĂȘ cĂČng bĂŠ nghÜa cho:
+ MĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” - mĂ©t tÝnh tĂ” - v” mĂ©t phĂŁ tĂ” khžc.
VÝ dî:
He runs very fast.
verb adv adv
She is terribly beautiful.
Adv adj
- Adj + ly = adv nhng ph¶i cÈn thËn v × kh«ng ph¶i bÊt cĂž tĂ” n”o cĂŁ Âź u«i ly ¼Òu
l” phĂŁ tĂ”. MĂ©t sĂš cžc tÝnh tĂ” cĂČng cĂŁ tËn cĂŻng l” ly.
VÝ dî:
Lovely, friendly, lonely.
- MĂ©t sĂš cžc cĂŽm tĂ” mĂ« ¼Çu b»ng giĂ­i tĂ” ¼Ó chØ ¼Þa Âź iÓm, thĂȘi gian, phÂŹ ng
tiÖn h”nh Âź Ă©ng, t ×nh huĂšng h”nh Âź Ă©ng cĂČng Âź Ăźc coi l” phĂŁ tĂ”. VÝ dĂŽ: in the
office.
- MĂ©t sĂš cžc phĂŁ tĂ” cĂŁ cÊu tÂčo ¼Æc biÖt nh soon, very, almost.
- VÞ trÝ cžc phĂŁ tĂ” trong tiÕng Anh t ÂŹ ng Âź Ăši tho¶i m ži nhng cĂČng cĂŁ nh Ă·ng phĂžc
tÂčp. CĂŁ mĂ©t sĂš quy luËt nh sau:
+ Cžc phĂŁ tĂ” bĂŠ ng Ă· sÏ thĂȘng xuyÂȘn ŸÞng Ă« cuĂši c ©u theo thĂž tĂč u tiÂȘn:
‱ chØ phÂŹ ng thĂžc h”nh Âź Ă©ng ( Âźu«i ly),
‱ chØ ¼Þa ¼ iÓm (here, there, at school...),
‱ chØ thĂȘi gian,
‱ chØ phÂŹ ng tiÖn h”nh Âź Ă©ng,
‱ chØ t ×nh huĂšng h”nh Âź Ă©ng.
+ MĂ©t phĂŁ tĂ” kh«ng bao giĂȘ Âź Ăźc ŸÞng xen v”o gi Ă·a Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” t ©n ng Ă·.
VÝ dî:
I have terribly a headache. (c ©u sai v × phĂŁ tĂ” ŸÞng xen gi Ă·a Âź Ă©ng
tÔ v” t ©n ng ÷ )
+ NÕu trong c ©u chØ cĂŁ phĂŁ tĂ” chØ thĂȘi gian th × nĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng lÂȘn ¼Çu
c ©u.
VÝ dî:
In 1975 I graduated but I didn’t find a job.
+ Cžc phĂŁ tĂ” chØ tÇn sĂš (always, sometimes...) thĂȘng bao giĂȘ cĂČng ŸÞng
trĂ­c Âź Ă©ng tĂ” chÝnh khi nĂŁ l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” h”nh Âź Ă©ng, nh ng bao giĂȘ cĂČng ŸÞng
sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be.
VÝ dî:
- They have often visited me recently.
- He always comes in time.
Nhng: The president is always in time.
21. §éng tÔ n Úi.
§ã l” cžc Ÿ éng tÔ trong b¶ng sau.
become
remain
appear
smell
taste
Cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” trÂȘn cĂŁ nh Ă·ng ¼Æc tÝnh sau:
‱ Kh«ng diÔn Âź Âčt h”nh Âź Ă©ng m” diÔn Âź Âčt b¶n chÊt cña sĂč vËt, sĂč viÖc, nh
m”u sŸc, mĂŻi vÞ ...
‱ §»ng sau chĂłng ph¶i l” mĂ©t tÝnh tĂ” kh«ng Âź Ăźc l” mĂ©t phĂŁ tĂ”.
Lu Ăœ: cžc cÆp Âź Ă©ng tĂ”
appear to happen
seem = to chance ( DĂȘng nh)
- To appear cĂŁ thÓ thay thÕ cho to seem v” ngĂźc lÂči nhng kh«ng thÓ thay thÕ cho
to happen v” to chance.
- 3 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be, to become, to remain cĂŁ nh Ă·ng trĂȘng hĂźp cĂŁ mĂ©t danh tĂ” hoÆc
mĂ©t ng Ă· danh tĂ” theo sau, lĂłc Âź ĂŁ chĂłng mÊt Âź i chĂžc nšng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nĂši.
- 4 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to feel, to look, to smell v” to taste trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp ¼ßi hĂĄi
sau nĂŁ l” danh tĂ” l”m t ©n ng Ă· v” trĂ« th”nh mĂ©t ngoÂči Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. LĂłc n”y chĂłng
mÊt Âź i chĂžc nšng cña mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nĂši v” trĂ« th”nh mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” diÔn Âź Âčt h”nh
Âź Ă©ng v” cĂŁ quyÒn ¼ßi hĂĄi 1 phĂŁ tĂ” Âź i bĂŠ trĂź (chĂłng thay Âź ĂŠi vÒ mÆt ng Ă·
nghÜa).
- To feel = sĂȘ, nŸn, khžm xÐt.
- to look at : nh ×n
- to smeel : ngöi.
- to taste : nÕm.
22. So s ž n h cña tÝnh tĂ” v ” d a n h tĂ”
22.1 S o sžn h b»n g.
So sžnh b»ng chØ ra 2 thĂčc thÓ chÝnh xžc giĂšng nhau (b»ng nhau hoÆc nh nhau)
v” ngĂźc lÂči nÕu cÊu trĂłc so sžnh Ă« dÂčng phñ ¼Þnh.
CÊu tróc
As ... as
adj noun
S + verb + as + + as +
adv
pronoun
‱ NÕu l” cÊu trĂłc phñ ¼Þnh as thĂž nhÊt cĂŁ thÓ thay b»ng so.
VÝ dî:
He is not so tall as his father.
L u Ăœ :
Ta cÇn ph¶i nhĂ­ r»ng Âź Âči tĂ” sau as lu«n Ă« dÂčng chñ ng Ă·.
Peter is as tall as I. You are as old as she.
M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ v Ò s o sžn h b»n g.
My book is as interesting as your.
TÝnh tĂ”
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar
Toefl grammar

More Related Content

Viewers also liked

CĂąÌu Hình ADSL
CĂąÌu Hình ADSLCĂąÌu Hình ADSL
CĂąÌu Hình ADSLxeroxk
 
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php-3
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php-3HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php-3
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php-3xeroxk
 
Module 8 configuring internet explorer 9.0
Module 8   configuring internet explorer 9.0Module 8   configuring internet explorer 9.0
Module 8 configuring internet explorer 9.0xeroxk
 
ThÆĄ TĂŹnh Tháșż Giới
ThÆĄ TĂŹnh Tháșż GiớiThÆĄ TĂŹnh Tháșż Giới
ThÆĄ TĂŹnh Tháșż Giớixeroxk
 
Lab security+baiso7 tancong iis5
Lab security+baiso7 tancong iis5Lab security+baiso7 tancong iis5
Lab security+baiso7 tancong iis5xeroxk
 
Sử DuÌŁng win 7
Sử DuÌŁng win 7Sử DuÌŁng win 7
Sử DuÌŁng win 7xeroxk
 
Lab seucrity+ Bài 6: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Dos TrĂȘn Internet
Lab seucrity+ Bài 6: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Dos TrĂȘn InternetLab seucrity+ Bài 6: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Dos TrĂȘn Internet
Lab seucrity+ Bài 6: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Dos TrĂȘn Internetxeroxk
 
Athena lab HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn HoÌŁc CCNA
Athena lab HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn HoÌŁc CCNAAthena lab HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn HoÌŁc CCNA
Athena lab HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn HoÌŁc CCNAxeroxk
 
Lab security+baiso3 ethereal
Lab security+baiso3 etherealLab security+baiso3 ethereal
Lab security+baiso3 etherealxeroxk
 
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng Lan
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng LanAthena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng Lan
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng Lanxeroxk
 
Lab security+ Bài 9: Ngăn ChÄƒÌŁn User BĂȘn Trong Lan Sử DuÌŁng Yahoo Messenger
Lab security+ Bài 9: Ngăn ChÄƒÌŁn User BĂȘn Trong Lan Sử DuÌŁng Yahoo MessengerLab security+ Bài 9: Ngăn ChÄƒÌŁn User BĂȘn Trong Lan Sử DuÌŁng Yahoo Messenger
Lab security+ Bài 9: Ngăn ChÄƒÌŁn User BĂȘn Trong Lan Sử DuÌŁng Yahoo Messengerxeroxk
 
Lab security+baiso8 netcat
Lab security+baiso8 netcatLab security+baiso8 netcat
Lab security+baiso8 netcatxeroxk
 
Lab security+ Bài 11: SSL
Lab security+ Bài 11: SSLLab security+ Bài 11: SSL
Lab security+ Bài 11: SSLxeroxk
 
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng WLan
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng WLanAthena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng WLan
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng WLanxeroxk
 
Lab seucrity+baiso6 tancongtreninternet
Lab seucrity+baiso6 tancongtreninternetLab seucrity+baiso6 tancongtreninternet
Lab seucrity+baiso6 tancongtreninternetxeroxk
 
Module 4 sharing files by using windows 7
Module 4   sharing files by using windows 7Module 4   sharing files by using windows 7
Module 4 sharing files by using windows 7xeroxk
 
Powerpoint 2010
Powerpoint 2010Powerpoint 2010
Powerpoint 2010xeroxk
 
TrĂČ ChÆĄi Táș­p Thể
TrĂČ ChÆĄi Táș­p ThểTrĂČ ChÆĄi Táș­p Thể
TrĂČ ChÆĄi Táș­p Thểxeroxk
 
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Sử DuÌŁng excel 2010
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Sử DuÌŁng excel 2010HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Sử DuÌŁng excel 2010
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Sử DuÌŁng excel 2010xeroxk
 

Viewers also liked (19)

CĂąÌu Hình ADSL
CĂąÌu Hình ADSLCĂąÌu Hình ADSL
CĂąÌu Hình ADSL
 
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php-3
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php-3HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php-3
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php-3
 
Module 8 configuring internet explorer 9.0
Module 8   configuring internet explorer 9.0Module 8   configuring internet explorer 9.0
Module 8 configuring internet explorer 9.0
 
ThÆĄ TĂŹnh Tháșż Giới
ThÆĄ TĂŹnh Tháșż GiớiThÆĄ TĂŹnh Tháșż Giới
ThÆĄ TĂŹnh Tháșż Giới
 
Lab security+baiso7 tancong iis5
Lab security+baiso7 tancong iis5Lab security+baiso7 tancong iis5
Lab security+baiso7 tancong iis5
 
Sử DuÌŁng win 7
Sử DuÌŁng win 7Sử DuÌŁng win 7
Sử DuÌŁng win 7
 
Lab seucrity+ Bài 6: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Dos TrĂȘn Internet
Lab seucrity+ Bài 6: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Dos TrĂȘn InternetLab seucrity+ Bài 6: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Dos TrĂȘn Internet
Lab seucrity+ Bài 6: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Dos TrĂȘn Internet
 
Athena lab HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn HoÌŁc CCNA
Athena lab HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn HoÌŁc CCNAAthena lab HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn HoÌŁc CCNA
Athena lab HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn HoÌŁc CCNA
 
Lab security+baiso3 ethereal
Lab security+baiso3 etherealLab security+baiso3 ethereal
Lab security+baiso3 ethereal
 
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng Lan
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng LanAthena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng Lan
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng Lan
 
Lab security+ Bài 9: Ngăn ChÄƒÌŁn User BĂȘn Trong Lan Sử DuÌŁng Yahoo Messenger
Lab security+ Bài 9: Ngăn ChÄƒÌŁn User BĂȘn Trong Lan Sử DuÌŁng Yahoo MessengerLab security+ Bài 9: Ngăn ChÄƒÌŁn User BĂȘn Trong Lan Sử DuÌŁng Yahoo Messenger
Lab security+ Bài 9: Ngăn ChÄƒÌŁn User BĂȘn Trong Lan Sử DuÌŁng Yahoo Messenger
 
Lab security+baiso8 netcat
Lab security+baiso8 netcatLab security+baiso8 netcat
Lab security+baiso8 netcat
 
Lab security+ Bài 11: SSL
Lab security+ Bài 11: SSLLab security+ Bài 11: SSL
Lab security+ Bài 11: SSL
 
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng WLan
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng WLanAthena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng WLan
Athena Bài Giảng MaÌŁng WLan
 
Lab seucrity+baiso6 tancongtreninternet
Lab seucrity+baiso6 tancongtreninternetLab seucrity+baiso6 tancongtreninternet
Lab seucrity+baiso6 tancongtreninternet
 
Module 4 sharing files by using windows 7
Module 4   sharing files by using windows 7Module 4   sharing files by using windows 7
Module 4 sharing files by using windows 7
 
Powerpoint 2010
Powerpoint 2010Powerpoint 2010
Powerpoint 2010
 
TrĂČ ChÆĄi Táș­p Thể
TrĂČ ChÆĄi Táș­p ThểTrĂČ ChÆĄi Táș­p Thể
TrĂČ ChÆĄi Táș­p Thể
 
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Sử DuÌŁng excel 2010
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Sử DuÌŁng excel 2010HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Sử DuÌŁng excel 2010
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Sử DuÌŁng excel 2010
 

Similar to Toefl grammar

Giao trinh toefl
Giao trinh toeflGiao trinh toefl
Giao trinh toefl
Quoc Nguyen
 
Giaotrinh toe fl
Giaotrinh toe flGiaotrinh toe fl
Giaotrinh toe flTuan Viet Tran
 
Ngu phap thay manh
Ngu phap thay manhNgu phap thay manh
Ngu phap thay manhThao Le
 
Ngu phap thay manh
Ngu phap thay manhNgu phap thay manh
Ngu phap thay manhChien Nguyen
 
Full toefl grammar
Full toefl grammarFull toefl grammar
Full toefl grammartiepcoi
 
Full+toefl grammar
Full+toefl grammarFull+toefl grammar
Full+toefl grammar
GOLDENDRAGON511
 
Toefl 1 1
Toefl 1 1Toefl 1 1
Toefl 1 1
Quoc Nguyen
 
Grammatica unit 3 klas 1
Grammatica unit 3 klas 1Grammatica unit 3 klas 1
Grammatica unit 3 klas 1Anoeska
 
Đồ ĂĄn tốt nghiệp Thiáșżt káșż RÆĄle điện từ trung gian xoay chiều _08305312092019
Đồ ĂĄn tốt nghiệp Thiáșżt káșż RÆĄle điện từ trung gian xoay chiều _08305312092019Đồ ĂĄn tốt nghiệp Thiáșżt káșż RÆĄle điện từ trung gian xoay chiều _08305312092019
Đồ ĂĄn tốt nghiệp Thiáșżt káșż RÆĄle điện từ trung gian xoay chiều _08305312092019
hanhha12
 
English Grammar in Use.pdf
English Grammar in Use.pdfEnglish Grammar in Use.pdf
English Grammar in Use.pdf
VeroCurzi1
 
eeon103
eeon103eeon103
eeon103
bilguun suhee
 
3 english 101 ŰȘÙ„ŰźÙŠŰ” Ù…Ű§ŰŻŰ©
3 english 101 ŰȘÙ„ŰźÙŠŰ” Ù…Ű§ŰŻŰ© 3 english 101 ŰȘÙ„ŰźÙŠŰ” Ù…Ű§ŰŻŰ©
3 english 101 ŰȘÙ„ŰźÙŠŰ” Ù…Ű§ŰŻŰ©
Basel Samhouri
 
Ngữ Phåp Anh Văn 12
Ngữ Phåp Anh Văn 12Ngữ Phåp Anh Văn 12
Ngữ Phåp Anh Văn 12
tuanpro102
 
murphy_raymond_english_grammar_in_use.pdf
murphy_raymond_english_grammar_in_use.pdfmurphy_raymond_english_grammar_in_use.pdf
murphy_raymond_english_grammar_in_use.pdf
fernanda469964
 
Ù…Ű°ÙƒŰ±Ű© Ű§Ù†ŰŹÙ„ÙŠŰČي + Ű§Ù„Ù‚Ű”Ű© Ù„Ù„Ű”Ù Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ Ű§Ù„Ű„ŰčŰŻŰ§ŰŻÙŠ Ű§Ù„ŰȘŰ±Ù… Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ 2017 - موقŰč ملŰČمŰȘي
Ù…Ű°ÙƒŰ±Ű© Ű§Ù†ŰŹÙ„ÙŠŰČي + Ű§Ù„Ù‚Ű”Ű© Ù„Ù„Ű”Ù Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ Ű§Ù„Ű„ŰčŰŻŰ§ŰŻÙŠ Ű§Ù„ŰȘŰ±Ù… Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ 2017 - موقŰč ملŰČمŰȘÙŠÙ…Ű°ÙƒŰ±Ű© Ű§Ù†ŰŹÙ„ÙŠŰČي + Ű§Ù„Ù‚Ű”Ű© Ù„Ù„Ű”Ù Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ Ű§Ù„Ű„ŰčŰŻŰ§ŰŻÙŠ Ű§Ù„ŰȘŰ±Ù… Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ 2017 - موقŰč ملŰČمŰȘي
Ù…Ű°ÙƒŰ±Ű© Ű§Ù†ŰŹÙ„ÙŠŰČي + Ű§Ù„Ù‚Ű”Ű© Ù„Ù„Ű”Ù Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ Ű§Ù„Ű„ŰčŰŻŰ§ŰŻÙŠ Ű§Ù„ŰȘŰ±Ù… Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ 2017 - موقŰč ملŰČمŰȘي
ملŰČمŰȘي
 
English school-books-1st-preparatory-1st-term-khawagah-2019-11
English school-books-1st-preparatory-1st-term-khawagah-2019-11English school-books-1st-preparatory-1st-term-khawagah-2019-11
English school-books-1st-preparatory-1st-term-khawagah-2019-11
khawagah
 
Present progressive tense
Present progressive tensePresent progressive tense
Present progressive tense
Henry Kleber
 
ÚŻŰ±Ű§Ù…Ű±
ÚŻŰ±Ű§Ù…Ű±ÚŻŰ±Ű§Ù…Ű±
ÚŻŰ±Ű§Ù…Ű±
Fonateam
 
english grammar
 english grammar english grammar
english grammar
FAiza Khan
 

Similar to Toefl grammar (20)

Giao trinh toefl
Giao trinh toeflGiao trinh toefl
Giao trinh toefl
 
Giaotrinh toe fl
Giaotrinh toe flGiaotrinh toe fl
Giaotrinh toe fl
 
Ngu phap thay manh
Ngu phap thay manhNgu phap thay manh
Ngu phap thay manh
 
Ngu phap thay manh
Ngu phap thay manhNgu phap thay manh
Ngu phap thay manh
 
Full toefl grammar
Full toefl grammarFull toefl grammar
Full toefl grammar
 
Full+toefl grammar
Full+toefl grammarFull+toefl grammar
Full+toefl grammar
 
Toefl 1 1
Toefl 1 1Toefl 1 1
Toefl 1 1
 
Grammatica unit 3 klas 1
Grammatica unit 3 klas 1Grammatica unit 3 klas 1
Grammatica unit 3 klas 1
 
Đồ ĂĄn tốt nghiệp Thiáșżt káșż RÆĄle điện từ trung gian xoay chiều _08305312092019
Đồ ĂĄn tốt nghiệp Thiáșżt káșż RÆĄle điện từ trung gian xoay chiều _08305312092019Đồ ĂĄn tốt nghiệp Thiáșżt káșż RÆĄle điện từ trung gian xoay chiều _08305312092019
Đồ ĂĄn tốt nghiệp Thiáșżt káșż RÆĄle điện từ trung gian xoay chiều _08305312092019
 
English Grammar in Use.pdf
English Grammar in Use.pdfEnglish Grammar in Use.pdf
English Grammar in Use.pdf
 
eeon103
eeon103eeon103
eeon103
 
3 english 101 ŰȘÙ„ŰźÙŠŰ” Ù…Ű§ŰŻŰ©
3 english 101 ŰȘÙ„ŰźÙŠŰ” Ù…Ű§ŰŻŰ© 3 english 101 ŰȘÙ„ŰźÙŠŰ” Ù…Ű§ŰŻŰ©
3 english 101 ŰȘÙ„ŰźÙŠŰ” Ù…Ű§ŰŻŰ©
 
Ngữ Phåp Anh Văn 12
Ngữ Phåp Anh Văn 12Ngữ Phåp Anh Văn 12
Ngữ Phåp Anh Văn 12
 
murphy_raymond_english_grammar_in_use.pdf
murphy_raymond_english_grammar_in_use.pdfmurphy_raymond_english_grammar_in_use.pdf
murphy_raymond_english_grammar_in_use.pdf
 
Ù…Ű°ÙƒŰ±Ű© Ű§Ù†ŰŹÙ„ÙŠŰČي + Ű§Ù„Ù‚Ű”Ű© Ù„Ù„Ű”Ù Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ Ű§Ù„Ű„ŰčŰŻŰ§ŰŻÙŠ Ű§Ù„ŰȘŰ±Ù… Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ 2017 - موقŰč ملŰČمŰȘي
Ù…Ű°ÙƒŰ±Ű© Ű§Ù†ŰŹÙ„ÙŠŰČي + Ű§Ù„Ù‚Ű”Ű© Ù„Ù„Ű”Ù Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ Ű§Ù„Ű„ŰčŰŻŰ§ŰŻÙŠ Ű§Ù„ŰȘŰ±Ù… Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ 2017 - موقŰč ملŰČمŰȘÙŠÙ…Ű°ÙƒŰ±Ű© Ű§Ù†ŰŹÙ„ÙŠŰČي + Ű§Ù„Ù‚Ű”Ű© Ù„Ù„Ű”Ù Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ Ű§Ù„Ű„ŰčŰŻŰ§ŰŻÙŠ Ű§Ù„ŰȘŰ±Ù… Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ 2017 - موقŰč ملŰČمŰȘي
Ù…Ű°ÙƒŰ±Ű© Ű§Ù†ŰŹÙ„ÙŠŰČي + Ű§Ù„Ù‚Ű”Ű© Ù„Ù„Ű”Ù Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ Ű§Ù„Ű„ŰčŰŻŰ§ŰŻÙŠ Ű§Ù„ŰȘŰ±Ù… Ű§Ù„ŰŁÙˆÙ„ 2017 - موقŰč ملŰČمŰȘي
 
English school-books-1st-preparatory-1st-term-khawagah-2019-11
English school-books-1st-preparatory-1st-term-khawagah-2019-11English school-books-1st-preparatory-1st-term-khawagah-2019-11
English school-books-1st-preparatory-1st-term-khawagah-2019-11
 
Leaders Attitude
Leaders AttitudeLeaders Attitude
Leaders Attitude
 
Present progressive tense
Present progressive tensePresent progressive tense
Present progressive tense
 
ÚŻŰ±Ű§Ù…Ű±
ÚŻŰ±Ű§Ù…Ű±ÚŻŰ±Ű§Ù…Ű±
ÚŻŰ±Ű§Ù…Ű±
 
english grammar
 english grammar english grammar
english grammar
 

More from xeroxk

BĂĄo cĂĄo NetCitizens Việt Nam- Tình hình sử duÌŁng và tĂŽÌc Ä‘ĂŽÌŁ phát triĂȘ̉n...
BĂĄo cĂĄo NetCitizens Việt Nam- Tình hình sử duÌŁng và tĂŽÌc Ä‘ĂŽÌŁ phát triĂȘ̉n...BĂĄo cĂĄo NetCitizens Việt Nam- Tình hình sử duÌŁng và tĂŽÌc Ä‘ĂŽÌŁ phát triĂȘ̉n...
BĂĄo cĂĄo NetCitizens Việt Nam- Tình hình sử duÌŁng và tĂŽÌc Ä‘ĂŽÌŁ phát triĂȘ̉n...
xeroxk
 
HiĂȘÌŁu ứng NÆ°ÆĄÌc trĂȘn Photoshop
HiĂȘÌŁu ứng NÆ°ÆĄÌc trĂȘn PhotoshopHiĂȘÌŁu ứng NÆ°ÆĄÌc trĂȘn Photoshop
HiĂȘÌŁu ứng NÆ°ÆĄÌc trĂȘn Photoshopxeroxk
 
MĂŽÌŁt SĂŽÌ ThuĂąÌŁt Ngữ Kinh TĂȘ́
MĂŽÌŁt SĂŽÌ ThuĂąÌŁt Ngữ Kinh TĂȘ́MĂŽÌŁt SĂŽÌ ThuĂąÌŁt Ngữ Kinh TĂȘ́
MĂŽÌŁt SĂŽÌ ThuĂąÌŁt Ngữ Kinh TĂȘ́xeroxk
 
XĂąy Dá»±ng ThÆ°ÆĄng Hiệu
XĂąy Dá»±ng ThÆ°ÆĄng HiệuXĂąy Dá»±ng ThÆ°ÆĄng Hiệu
XĂąy Dá»±ng ThÆ°ÆĄng Hiệuxeroxk
 
Xml
XmlXml
Xmlxeroxk
 
Lab linux pháș§n iv- Internet Services
Lab linux pháș§n iv- Internet ServicesLab linux pháș§n iv- Internet Services
Lab linux pháș§n iv- Internet Servicesxeroxk
 
Lab linux phan iii
Lab linux phan iiiLab linux phan iii
Lab linux phan iiixeroxk
 
Lab linux phan i, ii.doc
Lab linux phan i, ii.docLab linux phan i, ii.doc
Lab linux phan i, ii.docxeroxk
 
huong dan PHP-2
huong dan PHP-2huong dan PHP-2
huong dan PHP-2xeroxk
 
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn  PhpHÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn  Php
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Phpxeroxk
 
Module 10 configuring windows 7 media applications
Module 10   configuring windows 7 media applicationsModule 10   configuring windows 7 media applications
Module 10 configuring windows 7 media applicationsxeroxk
 
Module 12 wireless
Module 12   wirelessModule 12   wireless
Module 12 wirelessxeroxk
 
Module 6 configuring user account security
Module 6   configuring user account securityModule 6   configuring user account security
Module 6 configuring user account securityxeroxk
 
Module 3 configuring post-installation system settings
Module 3   configuring post-installation system settingsModule 3   configuring post-installation system settings
Module 3 configuring post-installation system settingsxeroxk
 
Module 7 configuring network security
Module 7   configuring network securityModule 7   configuring network security
Module 7 configuring network securityxeroxk
 
Lab security+ Bài 8: Netcat
Lab security+ Bài 8: NetcatLab security+ Bài 8: Netcat
Lab security+ Bài 8: Netcatxeroxk
 
Lab security+ Bài 1:Scanning
Lab security+ Bài 1:ScanningLab security+ Bài 1:Scanning
Lab security+ Bài 1:Scanningxeroxk
 
Lab security+ Bài 4: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Từ ChĂŽÌi DiÌŁch VuÌŁ Dos
Lab security+ Bài 4: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Từ ChĂŽÌi DiÌŁch VuÌŁ DosLab security+ Bài 4: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Từ ChĂŽÌi DiÌŁch VuÌŁ Dos
Lab security+ Bài 4: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Từ ChĂŽÌi DiÌŁch VuÌŁ Dosxeroxk
 

More from xeroxk (18)

BĂĄo cĂĄo NetCitizens Việt Nam- Tình hình sử duÌŁng và tĂŽÌc Ä‘ĂŽÌŁ phát triĂȘ̉n...
BĂĄo cĂĄo NetCitizens Việt Nam- Tình hình sử duÌŁng và tĂŽÌc Ä‘ĂŽÌŁ phát triĂȘ̉n...BĂĄo cĂĄo NetCitizens Việt Nam- Tình hình sử duÌŁng và tĂŽÌc Ä‘ĂŽÌŁ phát triĂȘ̉n...
BĂĄo cĂĄo NetCitizens Việt Nam- Tình hình sử duÌŁng và tĂŽÌc Ä‘ĂŽÌŁ phát triĂȘ̉n...
 
HiĂȘÌŁu ứng NÆ°ÆĄÌc trĂȘn Photoshop
HiĂȘÌŁu ứng NÆ°ÆĄÌc trĂȘn PhotoshopHiĂȘÌŁu ứng NÆ°ÆĄÌc trĂȘn Photoshop
HiĂȘÌŁu ứng NÆ°ÆĄÌc trĂȘn Photoshop
 
MĂŽÌŁt SĂŽÌ ThuĂąÌŁt Ngữ Kinh TĂȘ́
MĂŽÌŁt SĂŽÌ ThuĂąÌŁt Ngữ Kinh TĂȘ́MĂŽÌŁt SĂŽÌ ThuĂąÌŁt Ngữ Kinh TĂȘ́
MĂŽÌŁt SĂŽÌ ThuĂąÌŁt Ngữ Kinh TĂȘ́
 
XĂąy Dá»±ng ThÆ°ÆĄng Hiệu
XĂąy Dá»±ng ThÆ°ÆĄng HiệuXĂąy Dá»±ng ThÆ°ÆĄng Hiệu
XĂąy Dá»±ng ThÆ°ÆĄng Hiệu
 
Xml
XmlXml
Xml
 
Lab linux pháș§n iv- Internet Services
Lab linux pháș§n iv- Internet ServicesLab linux pháș§n iv- Internet Services
Lab linux pháș§n iv- Internet Services
 
Lab linux phan iii
Lab linux phan iiiLab linux phan iii
Lab linux phan iii
 
Lab linux phan i, ii.doc
Lab linux phan i, ii.docLab linux phan i, ii.doc
Lab linux phan i, ii.doc
 
huong dan PHP-2
huong dan PHP-2huong dan PHP-2
huong dan PHP-2
 
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn  PhpHÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn  Php
HÆ°ÆĄÌng DĂąÌƒn Php
 
Module 10 configuring windows 7 media applications
Module 10   configuring windows 7 media applicationsModule 10   configuring windows 7 media applications
Module 10 configuring windows 7 media applications
 
Module 12 wireless
Module 12   wirelessModule 12   wireless
Module 12 wireless
 
Module 6 configuring user account security
Module 6   configuring user account securityModule 6   configuring user account security
Module 6 configuring user account security
 
Module 3 configuring post-installation system settings
Module 3   configuring post-installation system settingsModule 3   configuring post-installation system settings
Module 3 configuring post-installation system settings
 
Module 7 configuring network security
Module 7   configuring network securityModule 7   configuring network security
Module 7 configuring network security
 
Lab security+ Bài 8: Netcat
Lab security+ Bài 8: NetcatLab security+ Bài 8: Netcat
Lab security+ Bài 8: Netcat
 
Lab security+ Bài 1:Scanning
Lab security+ Bài 1:ScanningLab security+ Bài 1:Scanning
Lab security+ Bài 1:Scanning
 
Lab security+ Bài 4: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Từ ChĂŽÌi DiÌŁch VuÌŁ Dos
Lab security+ Bài 4: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Từ ChĂŽÌi DiÌŁch VuÌŁ DosLab security+ Bài 4: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Từ ChĂŽÌi DiÌŁch VuÌŁ Dos
Lab security+ Bài 4: TĂąÌn CĂŽng Từ ChĂŽÌi DiÌŁch VuÌŁ Dos
 

Recently uploaded

June 3, 2024 Anti-Semitism Letter Sent to MIT President Kornbluth and MIT Cor...
June 3, 2024 Anti-Semitism Letter Sent to MIT President Kornbluth and MIT Cor...June 3, 2024 Anti-Semitism Letter Sent to MIT President Kornbluth and MIT Cor...
June 3, 2024 Anti-Semitism Letter Sent to MIT President Kornbluth and MIT Cor...
Levi Shapiro
 
Adversarial Attention Modeling for Multi-dimensional Emotion Regression.pdf
Adversarial Attention Modeling for Multi-dimensional Emotion Regression.pdfAdversarial Attention Modeling for Multi-dimensional Emotion Regression.pdf
Adversarial Attention Modeling for Multi-dimensional Emotion Regression.pdf
Po-Chuan Chen
 
Supporting (UKRI) OA monographs at Salford.pptx
Supporting (UKRI) OA monographs at Salford.pptxSupporting (UKRI) OA monographs at Salford.pptx
Supporting (UKRI) OA monographs at Salford.pptx
Jisc
 
special B.ed 2nd year old paper_20240531.pdf
special B.ed 2nd year old paper_20240531.pdfspecial B.ed 2nd year old paper_20240531.pdf
special B.ed 2nd year old paper_20240531.pdf
Special education needs
 
"Protectable subject matters, Protection in biotechnology, Protection of othe...
"Protectable subject matters, Protection in biotechnology, Protection of othe..."Protectable subject matters, Protection in biotechnology, Protection of othe...
"Protectable subject matters, Protection in biotechnology, Protection of othe...
SACHIN R KONDAGURI
 
Honest Reviews of Tim Han LMA Course Program.pptx
Honest Reviews of Tim Han LMA Course Program.pptxHonest Reviews of Tim Han LMA Course Program.pptx
Honest Reviews of Tim Han LMA Course Program.pptx
timhan337
 
The Challenger.pdf DNHS Official Publication
The Challenger.pdf DNHS Official PublicationThe Challenger.pdf DNHS Official Publication
The Challenger.pdf DNHS Official Publication
Delapenabediema
 
The Roman Empire A Historical Colossus.pdf
The Roman Empire A Historical Colossus.pdfThe Roman Empire A Historical Colossus.pdf
The Roman Empire A Historical Colossus.pdf
kaushalkr1407
 
Thesis Statement for students diagnonsed withADHD.ppt
Thesis Statement for students diagnonsed withADHD.pptThesis Statement for students diagnonsed withADHD.ppt
Thesis Statement for students diagnonsed withADHD.ppt
EverAndrsGuerraGuerr
 
Guidance_and_Counselling.pdf B.Ed. 4th Semester
Guidance_and_Counselling.pdf B.Ed. 4th SemesterGuidance_and_Counselling.pdf B.Ed. 4th Semester
Guidance_and_Counselling.pdf B.Ed. 4th Semester
Atul Kumar Singh
 
CACJapan - GROUP Presentation 1- Wk 4.pdf
CACJapan - GROUP Presentation 1- Wk 4.pdfCACJapan - GROUP Presentation 1- Wk 4.pdf
CACJapan - GROUP Presentation 1- Wk 4.pdf
camakaiclarkmusic
 
Home assignment II on Spectroscopy 2024 Answers.pdf
Home assignment II on Spectroscopy 2024 Answers.pdfHome assignment II on Spectroscopy 2024 Answers.pdf
Home assignment II on Spectroscopy 2024 Answers.pdf
Tamralipta Mahavidyalaya
 
Mule 4.6 & Java 17 Upgrade | MuleSoft Mysore Meetup #46
Mule 4.6 & Java 17 Upgrade | MuleSoft Mysore Meetup #46Mule 4.6 & Java 17 Upgrade | MuleSoft Mysore Meetup #46
Mule 4.6 & Java 17 Upgrade | MuleSoft Mysore Meetup #46
MysoreMuleSoftMeetup
 
The approach at University of Liverpool.pptx
The approach at University of Liverpool.pptxThe approach at University of Liverpool.pptx
The approach at University of Liverpool.pptx
Jisc
 
Unit 8 - Information and Communication Technology (Paper I).pdf
Unit 8 - Information and Communication Technology (Paper I).pdfUnit 8 - Information and Communication Technology (Paper I).pdf
Unit 8 - Information and Communication Technology (Paper I).pdf
Thiyagu K
 
Instructions for Submissions thorugh G- Classroom.pptx
Instructions for Submissions thorugh G- Classroom.pptxInstructions for Submissions thorugh G- Classroom.pptx
Instructions for Submissions thorugh G- Classroom.pptx
Jheel Barad
 
Welcome to TechSoup New Member Orientation and Q&A (May 2024).pdf
Welcome to TechSoup   New Member Orientation and Q&A (May 2024).pdfWelcome to TechSoup   New Member Orientation and Q&A (May 2024).pdf
Welcome to TechSoup New Member Orientation and Q&A (May 2024).pdf
TechSoup
 
1.4 modern child centered education - mahatma gandhi-2.pptx
1.4 modern child centered education - mahatma gandhi-2.pptx1.4 modern child centered education - mahatma gandhi-2.pptx
1.4 modern child centered education - mahatma gandhi-2.pptx
JosvitaDsouza2
 
The Accursed House by Émile Gaboriau.pptx
The Accursed House by Émile Gaboriau.pptxThe Accursed House by Émile Gaboriau.pptx
The Accursed House by Émile Gaboriau.pptx
DhatriParmar
 
The French Revolution Class 9 Study Material pdf free download
The French Revolution Class 9 Study Material pdf free downloadThe French Revolution Class 9 Study Material pdf free download
The French Revolution Class 9 Study Material pdf free download
Vivekanand Anglo Vedic Academy
 

Recently uploaded (20)

June 3, 2024 Anti-Semitism Letter Sent to MIT President Kornbluth and MIT Cor...
June 3, 2024 Anti-Semitism Letter Sent to MIT President Kornbluth and MIT Cor...June 3, 2024 Anti-Semitism Letter Sent to MIT President Kornbluth and MIT Cor...
June 3, 2024 Anti-Semitism Letter Sent to MIT President Kornbluth and MIT Cor...
 
Adversarial Attention Modeling for Multi-dimensional Emotion Regression.pdf
Adversarial Attention Modeling for Multi-dimensional Emotion Regression.pdfAdversarial Attention Modeling for Multi-dimensional Emotion Regression.pdf
Adversarial Attention Modeling for Multi-dimensional Emotion Regression.pdf
 
Supporting (UKRI) OA monographs at Salford.pptx
Supporting (UKRI) OA monographs at Salford.pptxSupporting (UKRI) OA monographs at Salford.pptx
Supporting (UKRI) OA monographs at Salford.pptx
 
special B.ed 2nd year old paper_20240531.pdf
special B.ed 2nd year old paper_20240531.pdfspecial B.ed 2nd year old paper_20240531.pdf
special B.ed 2nd year old paper_20240531.pdf
 
"Protectable subject matters, Protection in biotechnology, Protection of othe...
"Protectable subject matters, Protection in biotechnology, Protection of othe..."Protectable subject matters, Protection in biotechnology, Protection of othe...
"Protectable subject matters, Protection in biotechnology, Protection of othe...
 
Honest Reviews of Tim Han LMA Course Program.pptx
Honest Reviews of Tim Han LMA Course Program.pptxHonest Reviews of Tim Han LMA Course Program.pptx
Honest Reviews of Tim Han LMA Course Program.pptx
 
The Challenger.pdf DNHS Official Publication
The Challenger.pdf DNHS Official PublicationThe Challenger.pdf DNHS Official Publication
The Challenger.pdf DNHS Official Publication
 
The Roman Empire A Historical Colossus.pdf
The Roman Empire A Historical Colossus.pdfThe Roman Empire A Historical Colossus.pdf
The Roman Empire A Historical Colossus.pdf
 
Thesis Statement for students diagnonsed withADHD.ppt
Thesis Statement for students diagnonsed withADHD.pptThesis Statement for students diagnonsed withADHD.ppt
Thesis Statement for students diagnonsed withADHD.ppt
 
Guidance_and_Counselling.pdf B.Ed. 4th Semester
Guidance_and_Counselling.pdf B.Ed. 4th SemesterGuidance_and_Counselling.pdf B.Ed. 4th Semester
Guidance_and_Counselling.pdf B.Ed. 4th Semester
 
CACJapan - GROUP Presentation 1- Wk 4.pdf
CACJapan - GROUP Presentation 1- Wk 4.pdfCACJapan - GROUP Presentation 1- Wk 4.pdf
CACJapan - GROUP Presentation 1- Wk 4.pdf
 
Home assignment II on Spectroscopy 2024 Answers.pdf
Home assignment II on Spectroscopy 2024 Answers.pdfHome assignment II on Spectroscopy 2024 Answers.pdf
Home assignment II on Spectroscopy 2024 Answers.pdf
 
Mule 4.6 & Java 17 Upgrade | MuleSoft Mysore Meetup #46
Mule 4.6 & Java 17 Upgrade | MuleSoft Mysore Meetup #46Mule 4.6 & Java 17 Upgrade | MuleSoft Mysore Meetup #46
Mule 4.6 & Java 17 Upgrade | MuleSoft Mysore Meetup #46
 
The approach at University of Liverpool.pptx
The approach at University of Liverpool.pptxThe approach at University of Liverpool.pptx
The approach at University of Liverpool.pptx
 
Unit 8 - Information and Communication Technology (Paper I).pdf
Unit 8 - Information and Communication Technology (Paper I).pdfUnit 8 - Information and Communication Technology (Paper I).pdf
Unit 8 - Information and Communication Technology (Paper I).pdf
 
Instructions for Submissions thorugh G- Classroom.pptx
Instructions for Submissions thorugh G- Classroom.pptxInstructions for Submissions thorugh G- Classroom.pptx
Instructions for Submissions thorugh G- Classroom.pptx
 
Welcome to TechSoup New Member Orientation and Q&A (May 2024).pdf
Welcome to TechSoup   New Member Orientation and Q&A (May 2024).pdfWelcome to TechSoup   New Member Orientation and Q&A (May 2024).pdf
Welcome to TechSoup New Member Orientation and Q&A (May 2024).pdf
 
1.4 modern child centered education - mahatma gandhi-2.pptx
1.4 modern child centered education - mahatma gandhi-2.pptx1.4 modern child centered education - mahatma gandhi-2.pptx
1.4 modern child centered education - mahatma gandhi-2.pptx
 
The Accursed House by Émile Gaboriau.pptx
The Accursed House by Émile Gaboriau.pptxThe Accursed House by Émile Gaboriau.pptx
The Accursed House by Émile Gaboriau.pptx
 
The French Revolution Class 9 Study Material pdf free download
The French Revolution Class 9 Study Material pdf free downloadThe French Revolution Class 9 Study Material pdf free download
The French Revolution Class 9 Study Material pdf free download
 

Toefl grammar

  • 1. 1. Chñ ng Ă· (subject). 7 1.1 Danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc v” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc. 1.2 Qužn tĂ” a (an) v” the 1.3 Cžch sö dĂŽng Other v” another. 1.4 Cžch sö dĂŽng litter/ a litter, few/ a few 1.5 SĂ« h Ă·u cžch 1.6 Some, any 2. §éng tĂ” ( verb) 2.1 HiÖn tÂči (present) 2.1.1 HiÖntÂči Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n (simple present) 2.1.2 HiÖn tÂči tiÕp diÔn (present progressive) 2.1.3 Present perfect ( hiÖn tÂči ho”n th”nh) 2.1.4 HiÖn tÂči ho”n th”nh tiÕp diÔn ( preset perfect progressive) 2.2 Quž khĂž ( Past) 2.2.1 Quž khĂž Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n (simple past) 2.2.2 Quž khĂž tiÕp diÔn (Past progresive). 2.2.3 Quž khĂž ho”n th”nh (past perfect). 2.2.4 Quž khĂž ho”n th”nh tiÕp diÔn (past perfect progressive).
  • 2. 2.3 TÂŹ ng lai 2.3.1 TÂŹ ng lai Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n (simple future) 2.3.2 TÂŹ ng lai tiÕp diÔn ( future progressive) 2.3.3 TÂŹ ng lai ho”n th”nh (future perfect) 3. SĂč ho” hĂźp gi Ă·a chñ ng Ă· v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. 3.1 Chñ ng Ă· ŸÞng tžch khĂĄi Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. 3.2 Cžc danh tĂ” lu«n ¼ßi hĂĄi Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” Âź Âči tĂ” sĂš it. 3.3 Cžch sö dĂŽng none, no 3.4 Cžch sö dĂŽng cÊu trĂłc either ... or v” neither ... nor. 3.5 Cžc danh tĂ” tËp thÓ 3.6 Cžch sö dĂŽng A number of/ the number of 3.7 Cžc danh tĂ” lu«n dĂŻng Ă« sĂš nhiÒu. 3.8 Cžch dĂŻng cžc th”nh ng Ă· There is, there are 4. §Âči tĂ” 4.1 §Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng chñ ng Ă· (Subject pronoun) 4.2 §Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng t ©n ng Ă· 4.3 TÝnh tĂ” sĂ« h Ă·u 4.4 §Âči tĂ” sĂ« h Ă·u 4.5 §Âči tĂ” ph¶n th ©n (reflexive pronoun) 5. §éng tĂ” dĂŻng l”m t ©n ng Ă· 5.1 §éng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ l”m t ©n ng Ă· 5.2 Ving dĂŻng l”m t ©n ng Ă· 5.3 3 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼Æc biÖt 5.4 Cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ŸÞng Ÿ»ng sau giĂ­i tĂ” 5.5 VÊn ¼Ò Âź Âči tĂ” Âźi trĂ­c Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ hoÆc Ving l”m t ©n ng Ă·. 6. Cžch sö dĂŽng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” bžn khiÕm khuyÕt need v” dare 6.1 need
  • 3. 6.2 Dare 7. Cžch dĂŻng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be + infinitive 8. C©u hĂĄi 8.1 C©u hĂĄi yes v” no 8.2 C©u hĂĄi th«ng bžo 8.2.1 who v” what l”m chñ ng Ă·. 8.2.2 Whom v” what l” t ©n ng Ă· cña c©u hĂĄi 8.2.3 C©u hĂĄi d”nh cho cžc bĂŠ ng Ă· (when, where, why, how) 8.3 C©u hĂĄi gižn tiÕp (embedded questions) 8.4 C©u hĂĄi cĂŁ Âź u«i 9. LĂši nĂŁi phĂŽ hoÂč khÂŒng ¼Þnh v” phñ ¼Þnh. 9.1 LĂši nĂŁi phĂŽ hoÂč khÂŒng ¼Þnh. 9.2 LĂši nĂŁi phĂŽ hoÂč phñ ¼Þnh 10. C©u phñ ¼Þnh 11. MÖnh lÖnh thĂžc 11.1 MÖnh lÖnh thĂžc trĂčc tiÕp. 11.2 MÖnh lÖnh thĂžc gižn tiÕp. 12. §éng tĂ” khiÕm khuyÕt. 12.1 DiÔn Âź Âčt thĂȘi tÂŹ ng lai. 12.2 DiÔn Âź Âčt c ©u Âź iÒu kiÖn. 12.2.1 §iÒu kiÖn cĂŁ thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči. 12.2.2 §iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči. 12.2.3 §iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi quž khĂž. 12.2.4 Cžc cžch dĂŻng ¼Æc biÖt cña Will, would v” sould trong cžc mÖnh ¼Ò if 13. Cžch sö dĂŽng th”nh ng Ă· as if, as though. 13.1 ThĂȘi hiÖn tÂči.
  • 4. 13.2 ThĂȘi quž khĂž. 14. Cžch sö dĂŽng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” To hope v” to wish. 14.1 ThĂȘi tÂŹ ng lai. 14.2 ThĂȘi hiÖn tÂči 14.3 ThĂȘi quž khĂž. 15. Cžch sö dĂŽng th”nh ng Ă· used to v” get/be used to 15.1 used to. 15.2 get / be used to. 16. Cžch sö dĂŽng th”nh ng Ă· Would rather 16.1 LoÂči c©u cĂŁ mĂ©t chñ ng Ă·. 16.2 LoÂči c©u cĂŁ 2 chñ ng Ă· 17. Cžch sö dĂŽng Would Like 18. Cžch sö dĂŽng cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khiÕm khuyÕt ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt cžc trÂčng thži Ă« hiÖn tÂči. 18.1 Could/may/might. 18.2 Should 18.3 Must 19. Cžch sö dĂŽng cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khiÕm khuyÕt ¼Ó diÕn Âź Âčt cžc trÂčng thži Ă« thĂȘi quž khĂž. 20. tÝnh tĂ” v” phĂŁ tĂ” (adjective and adverb). 21. §éng tĂ” nĂši. 22. So sžnh cña tÝnh tĂ” v” danh tĂ” 22.1 So sžnh b»ng. 22.2 So sžnh h ÂŹn, kÐm 22.3 So sžnh hĂźp lĂœ 22.4 Cžc dÂčng so sžnh ¼Æc biÖt 22.5 So sžnh Âź a bĂ© 22.6 So sžnh kÐp (c”ng ....th × c”ng)
  • 5. 22.7 No sooner ... than (vĂ”a mĂ­i ... th ×; chÂŒng bao l ©u ... th ×) 23. DÂčng nguyÂȘn, so sžnh h ÂŹn v” so sžnh h ÂŹn nhÊt. 24. Cžc danh tĂ” l”m chĂžc nšng tÝnh tĂ” 25. Enough vĂ­i tÝnh tĂ”, phĂŁ tĂ” v” danh tĂ” 26. Cžc tĂ” nĂši chØ nguyÂȘn nh ©n 26.1 Because/ because of 26.2 MĂŽc ¼Ých v” kÕt qu¶ (so that- ¼Ó) 26.3 Cause and effect 27. MĂ©t sĂš tĂ” nĂši mang tÝnh Âź iÒu kiÖn 28. C©u bÞ Âź Ă©ng 29. §éng tĂ” g ©y nguyÂȘn nh ©n 29.1 Have/ get / make 29.2 Let 29.3 Help 30. Ba Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼Æc biÖt 31. CÊu trĂłc phĂžc hĂźp v” Âź Âči tĂ” quan hÖ thay thÕ 31.1 That v” Which l”m chñ ng Ă· cña c ©u phĂŽ 31.2 That v” wich l”m t ©n ng Ă· cña c ©u phĂŽ 31.3 Who l”m chñ ng Ă· cña c©u phĂŽ 31.4 Whom l”m t ©n ng Ă· cña c©u phĂŽ 31.5 MÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ bŸt buĂ©c v” mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ kh«ng bŸt buĂ©c 31.6 TÇm quan trĂ€ng cña dÊu phÈy trong mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ 31.7 Cžch sö dĂŽng All / both/ several / most ... + of + whom / which 31.8 What v” whose 32. Cžch loÂči bĂĄ cžc mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ
  • 6. 33. Cžch sö dĂŽng ph ©n tĂ” 1 trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp ¼Æc biÖt 34. Cžch sö dĂŽng nguyÂȘn mÉu ho”n th”nh 35. Nh Ă·ng cžch sö dĂŽng khžc cña that 35.1 That vĂ­i t cžch cña mĂ©t liÂȘn tĂ” (r»ng) 35.2 MÖnh ¼Ò cĂŁ that 36. C©u gi¶ ¼Þnh 36.1 C©u gi¶ ¼Þnh dĂŻng would rather that 36.2 C©u gi¶ ¼Þnh dĂŻng vĂ­i Âź Ă©ng tĂ” trong b¶ng. 36.3 C©u gi¶ ¼Þnh dĂŻng vĂ­i tÝnh tĂ” 36.4 DĂŻng vĂ­i mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp khžc 36.5 C©u gi¶ ¼Þnh dĂŻng vĂ­i it is time 37. LĂši nĂŁi bao h”m 37.1 Not only ... but also (kh«ng nh Ă·ng ... m” cßn) 37.2 As well as (cĂČng nh, cĂČng nh l”) 37.3 Both ... and ( c¶ ... lÉn ) 38. Cžch sö dĂŽng to know v” to know how 39. MÖnh ¼Ò nhĂźng bĂ© 39.1 Despite / in spite of (mÆc dĂŻ) 39.2 although, even though, though 40. Nh Ă·ng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” dÔ g ©y nhÇm lÉn 41. MĂ©t sĂš Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼Æc biÖt khžc. PhÇn IIPhÇn II TiÕng Anh viÕtTiÕng Anh viÕt I. Cžc lçi thĂȘng gÆp trong tiÕng anh viÕt 42. SĂč ho” hĂźp cña thĂȘi Âź Ă©ng tĂ” 43. Cžch sö dĂŽng to say, to tell
  • 7. 44. TĂ” Âźi trĂ­c ¼Ó giĂ­i thiÖu 45. §Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng one v” you 46. Cžch sö dĂŽng ph ©n tĂ” mĂ« ¼Çu cho mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ 46.1 V+ing mĂ« ¼Çu mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ 46.2 Ph©n tĂ” 2 mĂ« ¼Çu mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ ¼Ó chØ bÞ Âź Ă©ng 46.3 §éng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ chØ mĂŽc ¼Ých mĂ« ¼Çu cho mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ 46.4 Ng Ă· danh tĂ” hoÆc ng Ă· giĂ­i tĂ” mĂ« ¼Çu mÖnh ¼Ò phĂŽ chØ sĂč tÂŹ ng Ăžng 47. Ph©n tĂ” dĂŻng l”m tÝnh tĂ” 47.1 DĂŻng ph ©n tĂ” 1 l”m tÝnh tĂ” 47.2 DĂŻng ph ©n tĂ” 2 l”m tÝnh tĂ” 48. ThĂ”a (redundancy) 49. CÊu trĂłc c ©u song song 50. Th«ng tin trĂčc tiÕp v” th«ng tin gižn tiÕp 50.1 C©u trĂčc tiÕp v” c©u gižn tiÕp 50.2 PhÂŹ ng phžp chuyÓn Âź ĂŠi tĂ” c©u trĂčc tiÕp sang c©u gižn tiÕp 50.3 §éng tĂ” vĂ­i t ©n ng Ă· trĂčc tiÕp v” t ©n ng Ă· gižn tiÕp 51. PhĂŁ tĂ” Âź ¶o lÂȘn ¼Çu c©u 52. Cžch chĂ€n nh Ă·ng c©u tr¶ lĂȘi Ÿóng 53. Nh Ă·ng tĂ” dÔ g ©y nhÇm lÉn 54. Cžch sö dĂŽng giĂ­i tĂ” 54.1 During - trong suĂšt (h”nh Âź Ă©ng x¶y ra trong mĂ©t qu·ng thĂȘi gian) 54.2 From (tĂ”) > < to ( ¼Õn) 54.3 Out of (ra khĂĄi) > < into (di v”o) 54.4 by
  • 8. 54.5 In (Ă« trong, Ă« tÂči) - nghÜa xžc ¼Þnh h ÂŹn at 54.6 on 54.7 at - Ă« tÂči (thĂȘng l” bÂȘn ngo”i, kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh b»ng in) 55. Ng Ă· Âź Ă©ng tĂ” 56. SĂč kÕt hĂźp cña cžc danh tĂ”, Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” tÝnh tĂ” vĂ­i cžc giĂ­i tĂ” GRAMMAR REVIEW CÊu trĂłc c© u tiÕn g An h Subject + Verb as predicate + Complement + Modifier. Chñ ng Ă· §éng tĂ” vÞ ng Ă· t ©n ng Ă· bĂŠ ng Ă· 1. Chñ n g Ă· (su bject) ‱ §Þng ¼Çu c ©u l”m chñ ng Ă· v” quyÕt ¼Þnh viÖc chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. ‱ Chñ ng Ă· cĂŁ thÓ l” 1 cĂŽm tĂ”, 1 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ (cĂŁ to), 1 V+ing, song nhiÒu nhÊt vÉn l” 1 danh tĂ” v × 1 danh tĂ” cĂŁ liÂȘn quan tĂ­i nh Ă·ng vÊn ¼Ò sau: 1. 1 Dan h t Ă” Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc v ” k h«n g Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc. - Danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng vĂ­i sĂš ¼Õm do Âź ĂŁ cĂŁ h ×nh thži sĂš Ýt, sĂš nhiÒu. NĂŁ cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng vĂ­i a (an) v” the. - Danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc kh«ng dĂŻng Âź Ăźc vĂ­i sĂš ¼Õm do Âź ĂŁ nĂŁ kh«ng cĂŁ h ×nh thži sĂš nhiÒu. Do Âź ĂŁ, nĂŁ kh«ng dĂŻng Âź Ăźc vĂ­i a (an). - MĂ©t sĂš cžc danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc cĂŁ h ×nh thži sĂš nhiÒu ¼Æc biÖt vÝ dĂŽ: person - people woman – women mouse - mice foot – feet tooth - teeth man - men. -Sau Âź © y l” mĂ©t sĂš danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc m” ta cÇn biÕt.
  • 9. Sand soap physics mathematic s News mumps Air politics measles information Meat homework food economics advertising * Money * MÆc dĂŻ advertising l” danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc, nhng advertisement lÂči l” danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc. VÝ dĂŽ: There are too many advertisements during television shows. There is too much advertising during television shows. - MĂ©t sĂš danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc nh food, meat, money, sand, water, Âź «i lĂłc Âź - Ăźc dĂŻng nh cžc danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc ¼Ó chØ cžc dÂčng khžc nhau cña loÂči danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ. VÝ dĂŽ: This is one of the foods that my doctor has forbidden me to eat. (chØ ra mĂ©t loÂči thĂžc šn ¼Æc biÖt n”o Âź ĂŁ) He studies meats ( chÂŒng hÂčn pork, beef, lamb. vv...) B¶n g s a u l” cžc Âź Þ n h n g Ă· dĂŻn g Âź Ăźc vĂ­i dan h t Ă” Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc v ” k h«n g Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc. Danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc (with count noun) Danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc (with non-count noun) a (an), the, some, any this, that, these, those, none,one,two,three,... many a lot of plenty of a large number of a great number of, a great many of. (a) few few ... than more ... than the, some, any this, that non much (thĂȘng dĂŻng trong c ©u phñ ¼Þnh hoÆc c ©u hĂĄi a lot of a large amount of a great deal of (a) little less ... than more ... than - Danh tĂ” time nÕu dĂŻng vĂ­i nghÜa thĂȘi gian l” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc nhng nÕu dĂŻng vĂ­i nghÜa sĂš lÇn hoÆc thĂȘi Âź Âči lÂči l” danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc. VÝ dĂŽ:
  • 10. We have spent too much time on this homework. She has been late for class six times this semester. 1. 2 Q užn t Ă” a (an) v ” t h e 1- a v Μ a n an - Âź Ăźc dĂŻn g: - trĂ­c 1 danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt ¼Õm Âź Ăźc bŸt ¼Çu b»ng 4 nguyÂȘn © m (vowel) a, e, i, o - hai bžn nguyÂȘn © m u, y - cžc danh tĂ” bŸt ¼Çu b»ng h c © m. vÝ dĂŽ: u : an uncle. h : an hour - hoÆc trĂ­c cžc danh tĂ” viÕt tŸt Âź Ăźc Âź Ă€c nh 1 nguyÂȘn © m. VÝ dĂŽ: an L-plate, an SOS, an MP a : Âź Ăźc dĂŻn g: - trĂ­c 1 danh tĂ” bŸt ¼Çu b»ng phĂŽ © m (consonant). - dĂŻng trĂ­c mĂ©t danh tĂ” bŸt ¼Çu b»ng uni. a university, a uniform, a universal, a union. - trĂ­c 1 danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt ¼Õm Âź Ăźc, trĂ­c 1 danh tĂ” kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ vÒ mÆt ¼Æc Âź iÓm, tÝnh chÊt, vÞ trÝ hoÆc Âź Ăźc nhŸc ¼Õn lÇn ¼Çu trong c ©u. - Âź Ăźc dĂŻng trong cžc th”nh ng Ă· chØ sĂš lĂźng nhÊt ¼Þnh. VÝ dĂŽ : a lot of, a couple, a dozen, a great many, a great deal of. - dĂŻng trĂ­c nh Ă·ng sĂš ¼Õm nhÊt ¼Þnh, ¼Æc biÖt l” chØ h”ng tršm, h”ng ng”n. VÝ dĂŽ: a hundred, a thousand. - trĂ­c half khi nĂŁ theo sau 1 Âź ÂŹ n vÞ nguyÂȘn vÑn. VÝ dĂŽ: a kilo and a half v” cĂČng cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ă€c l” one and a half kilos. Ch Ăł Ăœ : 1 /2 kg = half a kilo ( kh«ng cĂŁ a trĂ­c half). - dĂŻng trĂ­c half khi nĂŁ Âź i vĂ­i 1 danh tĂ” khžc tÂčo th”nh tĂ” ghÐp. VÝ dĂŽ : a half-holiday nöa kĂș nghØ, a half-share : nöa cĂŠ phÇn. - dĂŻng trĂ­c cžc tĂ» sĂš nh 1/3, 1 /4, 1/5, = a third, a quarter, a fifth hay one third, one fourth, one fifth . - DĂŻng trong cžc th”nh ng Ă· chØ giž c¶, tĂšc Âź Ă©, tĂ» lÖ. VÝ dĂŽ: five dolars a kilo; four times a day. - DĂŻng trong cžc th”nh ng Ă· tr Ă­c cžc danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt ¼Õm Âź Ăźc, dĂŻng trong c ©u c¶m thžn. VÝ dĂŽ: Such a long queue! What a pretty girl! Nhng: such long queues! What pretty girls. - a cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc ¼Æt trĂ­c Mr/Mrs/Miss + tÂȘn hĂ€ (surname):
  • 11. VÝ dĂŽ: a Mr Smith, a Mrs Smith, a Miss Smith. a Mr Smith nghÜa l” ‘ ngĂȘi Âź ”n «ng Âź Ăźc gĂ€i l” Smith’ v” ngĂŽ Ăœ l” «ng ta l” ngĂȘi lÂč Âź Ăši vĂ­i ngĂȘi nĂŁi. Cßn nÕu kh«ng cĂŁ a tĂžc l” ngĂȘi nĂŁi biÕt «ng Smith. 2- The - §ßc sö dĂŽng khi danh tĂ” Âź Ăźc xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ vÒ tÝnh chÊt, ¼Æc Âź iÓm, vÞ trÝ hoÆc Âź Ăźc nhŸc ¼Õn lÇn thĂž 2 trong c ©u. - Th e + n o u n + pr e p o sition + n o u n. VÝ dĂŽ : the girl in blue; the man with a banner; the gulf of Mexico; the United States of America. - Th e + dan h t Ă” + Âź Âč i t Ă” q u an h Ö + m Ö n h Âź Ò p h ĂŽ VÝ dĂŽ: the boy whom I met; the place where I met him. - TrĂ­c 1 danh tĂ” ngĂŽ Ăœ chØ mĂ©t vËt riÂȘng biÖt. VÝ dĂŽ: She is in the garden. - The + tÝnh tĂ” so sžnh bËc nhÊt hoÆc sĂš tĂ” thĂž tĂč hoÆc only way. VÝ dĂŽ : The first week; the only way. - The + dt sĂš Ýt tĂźng trng cho mĂ©t nhĂŁm thĂł vËt hoÆc Âź Ă„ vËt th × cĂŁ thÓ bĂĄ the v” Âź ĂŠi danh tĂ” sang sĂš nhiÒu. VÝ dĂŽ: The whale = Whales, the shark = sharks, the deep-freeze = deep - freezes. Nhng Âź Ăši vĂ­i danh tĂ” m a n (chØ lo”i ngĂȘi) th × kh«ng cĂŁ qužn tĂ” (a, the) ŸÞng trĂ­c. VÝ dĂŽ: if oil supplies run out, man may have to fall back on the horse. - Th e + dan h t Ă” s Ăš Ýt chØ th”nh viÂȘn cña mĂ©t nhĂŁm ngĂȘi nhÊt ¼Þnh. VÝ dĂŽ: the small shopkeeper is finding life increasingly difficult. - Th e + adj Âź Âči diÖn cho 1 lĂ­p ngĂȘi, nĂŁ kh«ng cĂŁ h ×nh thži sĂš nhiÒu nhng Âź Ăźc coi l” 1 danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau nĂŁ ph¶i Âź Ăźc chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu. VÝ dĂŽ: the old = ngĂȘi gi” nĂŁi chung; The disabled = nh Ă·ng ngĂȘi t”n tËt; The unemployed = nh Ă·ng ngĂȘi thÊt nghiÖp. - DĂŻng trĂ­c tÂȘn cžc khu vĂčc, vĂŻng Âź · nĂŠi tiÕng vÒ mÆt ¼Þa lĂœ hoÆc lÞch sö. VÝ dĂŽ: The Shahara. The Netherlands. The Atlantic. - Th e + E a s t / We s t/ S o u t h/ Nor t h + n o u n. VÝ dĂŽ: the East/ West end. The North / South Pole. Nhng kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng the trĂ­c cžc tĂ” chØ phÂŹ ng hĂ­ng n”y, nÕu nĂŁ Âź i kÌm vĂ­i tÂȘn cña mĂ©t khu vĂčc ¼Þa lĂœ. VÝ dĂŽ: South Africal, North Americal, West Germany. - Th e + t ÂȘ n cžc Âź Ă„ hĂźp xĂ­n g, cžc d ” n n hÂčc c ĂŠ Âź i Ó n, cžc b a n n hÂčc p h ĂŠ t h«n g . VÝ dĂŽ: the Bach choir, the Philadenphia Orchestra, the Beatles.
  • 12. - Th e + t ÂȘ n cžc t ĂȘ bžo lĂ­n/ cžc co n tÇ u bi Ó n/ k hin h k hÝ cÇu . VÝ dĂŽ: The Titanic, the Time, the Great Britain. - Th e + t ÂȘ n h Ă€ Ă« s Ăš n hi Ò u cĂŁ nghÜa l” gia Âź × nh hĂ€ nh” ... VÝ dĂŽ: the Smiths = Mr and Mrs Smith (and their children) hay cßn gĂ€i l” gia Âź × nh nh” Smith. - Th e + TÂȘn Ă« s Ăš Ýt + c ĂŽ m t Ă”/ m Ö n h Âź Ò cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng ¼Ó ph ©n biÖt ngĂȘi n”y vĂ­i ngĂȘi khžc cĂŻng tÂȘn. VÝ dĂŽ: We have two Mr Smiths. Which do you want? I want the Mr Smith who signed this letter. - Kh«ng dĂŻng the trĂ­c 1 sĂš danh tĂ” nh Home, church, bed, court, hospital, prison, school, college, university khi nĂŁ Âź i vĂ­i Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” giĂ­i tĂ” chØ chuyÓn Âź Ă©ng (chØ Âź i tĂ­i Âź ĂŁ l”m mĂŽc ¼Ých chÝnh). VÝ dĂŽ: He is at home. I arrived home before dark. I sent him home. to bed ( ¼Ó ngñ) to church ( ¼Ó cÇu nguyÖn) to court ( ¼Ó kiÖn tĂŽng) We go to hospital (ch Ă·a bÖnh) to prison ( Âźi tĂŻ) to school / college/ university ( ¼Ó hĂ€c) TÂŹ ng tĂč in bed at church We can be in court in hospital at school/ college/ university We can be / get back (hoÆc be/ get home) from school/ college/university. leave school We can leave hospital be released from prison. VĂ­i mĂŽc ¼Ých khžc th × ph¶i dĂŻng the. VÝ dĂŽ: I went to the church to see the stained glass. He goes to the prison sometimes to give lectures. Student go to the university for a class party. ‱ Se a Go to sea (thñy thñ Âź i biÓn) to be at the sea (h”nh khžch/ thuĂ» thñ Âź i trÂȘn biÓn)
  • 13. Go to the sea / be at the sea = to go to/ be at the seaside : Âź i tŸm biÓn, nghØ m žt. We can live by / near the sea. ‱ Work a n d office. Work (n ÂŹi l”m viÖc) Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng kh«ng cĂŁ the Ă« trĂ­c. Go to work. nhng office lÂči ph¶i cĂŁ the. Go to the office. VÝ dĂŽ: He is at / in the office. NÕu to be in office (kh«ng cĂŁ the) nghÜa l” Âź ang gi Ă· chĂžc. To be out of office - th«i gi Ă· chĂžc. ‱ Town The cĂŁ thÓ bĂĄ Âź i khi nĂŁi vÒ thÞ trÊn cña ngĂȘi nĂŁi hoÆc cña chñ thÓ. VÝ dĂŽ: We go to town sometimes to buy clothes. We were in town last Monday. Go to town / to be in town - VĂ­i mĂŽc ¼Ých chÝnh l” Âź i mua h”ng. B¶n g dĂŻn g t h e v ” k h«n g dĂŻn g t h e tr o n g m Ă© t s Ăš tr ĂȘ n g hĂźp Âź Æ c bi Ö t. DĂŻn g the Kh«ng dĂŻn g th e ‱ TrĂ­c cžc Âź Âči dÂŹ ng, s«ng ngßi, biÓn, vÞnh v” cžc hĂ„ Ă« sĂš nhiÒu. VÝ dĂŽ: The Red sea, the Atlantic Ocean, the Persian Gulf, the Great Lackes. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc d·y nĂłi. VÝ dĂŽ: The Rockey Moutains. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn 1 vËt thÓ duy nhÊt trÂȘn thÕ giĂ­i hoÆc vĂČ trĂŽ. VÝ dĂŽ: The earth, the moon, the Great Wall ‱ TrĂ­c School/college/university + of + noun VÝ dĂŽ: The University of Florida. The college of Arts and Sciences. ‱ TrĂ­c cžc sĂš thĂž tĂč + noun. VÝ dĂŽ: The first world war. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn 1 hĂ„ (hay cžc hĂ„ Ă« sĂš Ýt). VÝ dĂŽ: Lake Geneva, Lake Erie ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn 1 ngĂ€n nĂłi VÝ dĂŽ: Mount Mckinley ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc h”nh tinh hoÆc cžc chĂŻm sao VÝ dĂŽ: Venus, Mars, Earth, Orion. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc trĂȘng n”y khi trĂ­c nĂŁ l” 1 tÂȘn riÂȘng. VÝ dĂŽ: Cooper’s Art school, Stetson University. ‱ TrĂ­c cžc danh tĂ” m” sau nĂŁ l” 1 sĂš ¼Õm.
  • 14. The third chapter. ‱ TrĂ­c cžc cuĂ©c chiÕn tranh khu vĂčc vĂ­i Âź iÒu kiÖn tÂȘn cžc khu vĂčc Âź ĂŁ ph¶i Âź Ăźc tÝnh tĂ” hož. VÝ dĂŽ: The Korean war. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc nĂ­c cĂŁ tĂ” 2 tĂ” trĂ« lÂȘn. NgoÂči trĂ” Great Britain. VÝ dĂŽ: The United States, the United Kingdom, the Central Africal Republic. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc nĂ­c Âź Ăźc coi l” 1 quÇn Âź ¶o. VÝ dĂŽ: The Philipin. ‱ TrĂ­c cžc t”i liÖu hoÆc sĂč kiÖn mang tÝnh lÞch sö. VÝ dĂŽ: The constitution, the Magna Carta. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc nhĂŁm d ©n tĂ©c thiÓu sĂš. VÝ dĂŽ: The Indians, the Aztecs. ‱ NÂȘn dĂŻng trĂ­c tÂȘn cžc nhÂčc cĂŽ. VÝ dĂŽ: To play the piano. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc m«n hĂ€c cĂŽ thÓ. VÝ dĂŽ: The applied Math. The theoretical Physics. VÝ dĂŽ: World war one chapter three. ‱ Kh«ng nÂȘn dĂŻng trĂ­c tÂȘn cžc cuĂ©c chiÕn tranh khu vĂčc nÕu tÂȘn khu vĂčc ¼Ó nguyÂȘn. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc nĂ­c cĂŁ 1 tĂ” nh : Sweden, Venezuela v” cžc nĂ­c Âź Ăźc ŸÞng trĂ­c bĂ«i new hoÆc tÝnh tĂ” chØ phÂŹ ng h- Ă­ng. VÝ dĂŽ: New Zealand, South Africa. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc lĂŽc ¼Þa, tiÓu bang, tØnh, th”nh phĂš, quËn, huyÖn. VÝ dĂŽ: Europe, California. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn bÊt cĂž m«n thÓ thao n”o. VÝ dĂŽ: Base ball, basket ball. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc danh tĂ” mang tÝnh trĂ”u tĂźng trĂ” nh Ă·ng trĂȘng hĂźp ¼Æc biÖt. VÝ dĂŽ: Freedom, happiness. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc m«n hĂ€c chung. VÝ dĂŽ: Mathematics, Sociology. ‱ TrĂ­c tÂȘn cžc ng”y lÔ, tÕt. VÝ dĂŽ: Christmas, thanksgiving. 1. 3 Cžch s ö d ĂŽ n g O t h e r v ” an ot h er. Hai tĂ” n”y tuy giĂšng nhau vÒ mÆt ng Ă· nghÜa nhng khžc nhau vÒ mÆt ng Ă· phžp. DĂŻng vĂ­i danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc DĂŻng vĂŁi danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc ‱ another + dt Âź 2 sĂš it = 1 cži n Ă·a, 1 cži khžc, 1 ngĂȘi n Ă·a, 1 ngĂȘi khžc. VÝ dĂŽ: another pencil ‱ other + dt Âź 2 sĂš nhiÒu = mÊy cži n Ă·a, mÊy cži khžc, mÊy ngĂȘi n Ă·a, mÊy ngĂȘi khžc. VÝ dĂŽ: other pencils = some more. ‱ the other + dt Âź 2 sĂš nhiÒu = nh Ă·ng cži cuĂši cĂŻng, nh Ă·ng ngĂȘi cuĂši cĂŻng ‱ the other + dt Âź 2 sĂš Ýt = ngĂȘi cuĂši cĂŻng, cži cuĂši cĂŻng cña 1 bĂ©, 1 nhĂŁm. ‱ other + dt kh«ng Âź 2 = 1 chĂłt n Ă·a. VÝ dĂŽ: other water = some more water. other beer = some more beer. ‱ the other + dt kh«ng Âź 2 = chç cßn sĂŁt lÂči.
  • 15. cßn lÂči. VÝ dĂŽ: the other pencils = all remaining pencils VÝ dĂŽ: The other beer = the remaining beer. (chç bia cßn lÂči) - Another v” other l” kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh trong khi the other l” xžc ¼Þnh. NÕu danh tĂ” hoÆc chñ ng Ă· Ă« trÂȘn Âź · Âź Ăźc hiÓu hoÆc Âź Ăźc nhŸc ¼Õn, chØ cÇn dĂŻng another v” other nh 1 Âź Âči tĂ” l” Âź ñ. VÝ dĂŽ: I don’t want this book. Please give me another. - NÕu danh tĂ” Âź Ăźc thay thÕ l” sĂš nhiÒu th × other Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng theo 1 trong 2 cžch (other + nouns hoÆc others) m” kh«ng bao giĂȘ Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng (others + DTSN). - CĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng Âź Âči tĂ” thay thÕ one hoÆc ones cho danh tĂ” sau another, the other v” other. Lu Ăœ r»ng this v” that cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng vĂ­i Âź Âči tĂ” one nhng these v” those tuyÖt Âź Ăši kh«ng dĂŻng vĂ­i ones. 1. 4 Cžch s ö d ĂŽ n g litt e r/ a litt er, f e w/ a f e w - Littl e + d t k h«n g Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc : rÊt Ýt, hÇu nh kh«ng. VÝ dĂŽ: There is little water in the bottle. I have little money, not enough to buy groceries. - A littl e + d t k h«n g Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc: cĂŁ 1 chĂłt, Âź ñ ¼Ó dĂŻng. VÝ dĂŽ: I have a little money, enough to buy a ticket. - f e w + d t Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc s Ăš n hi Ò u : cĂŁ rÊt Ýt, kh«ng Âź ñ. VÝ dĂŽ: She has few books, not enough for references. - a f e w + d t Âź Õ m Âź Ăźc s Ăš n hiÒ u : cĂŁ mĂ©t Ýt, Âź ñ ¼Ó. VÝ dĂŽ: She has a few books, enough to read. - NÕu danh tĂ” Ă« trÂȘn Âź · Âź Ăźc nhŸc ¼Õn th × Ă« dĂ­i chØ cÇn dĂŻng (a) few v” (a) little nh 1 Âź Âči tĂ” l” Âź ñ. VÝ dĂŽ: Are you ready in money? Yes, a little. - quite a few = quite a lot = quite a bit = khž nhiÒu. - only a few = only a little = cĂŁ rÊt Ýt ( nhÊn mÂčnh). 1. 5 S Ă« h Ă· u cžch Th e + n o u n ’s + n o u n.
  • 16. - ChØ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng trong cžc danh tĂ” chØ ngĂȘi hoÆc Âź Ă©ng vËt, kh«ng dĂŻng cho bÊt Âź Ă©ng vËt. VÝ dĂŽ: The student’s book. The cat’s legs. - NÕu cĂŁ 2 danh tĂ” cĂŻng ŸÞng Ă« sĂ« h Ă·u cžch th × danh tĂ” n”o ŸÞng gÇn danh tĂ” bÞ sĂ« h Ă·u nhÊt sÏ mang dÊu sĂ« h Ă·u. VÝ dĂŽ: Tom and Mark’s house. - §Úi vĂ­i nh Ă·ng danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu Âź · cĂŁ s th × chØ cÇn ¼Æt dÊu ‘ l” Âź ñ. VÝ dĂŽ: The students’ books. - Nhng Âź Ăši vĂ­i nh Ă·ng danh tĂ” cĂŁ sĂš nhiÒu ¼Æc biÖt kh«ng cĂŁ s tÂči Âź u«i vÉn ph¶i dĂŻng nguyÂȘn dÊu sĂ« h Ă·u. VÝ dĂŽ: The children’s toys. - NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng cho thĂȘi gian (nšm thžng, thÕ kĂ», thiÂȘn niÂȘn kĂ».) VÝ dĂŽ: The 1980’ events. The 21 st century’s prospect. - NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng cho cžc mĂŻa trong nšm ngoÂči trĂ” mĂŻa Xu ©n v” mĂŻa Thu. NÕu dĂŻng sĂ« h Ă·u cžch cho mĂŻa Xu ©n v” mĂŻa Thu tĂžc l” ta Âź ang nh ©n cžch hož mĂŻa Âź ĂŁ. VÝ dĂŽ: The summer’s hot days. The winter’s cold days. The spring’s coming back = N”ng Xu ©n Âź ang trĂ« vÒ. The autunm’s leaving = sĂč ra Âź i cña N”ng Thu. TrĂȘng hĂźp n”y hiÖn nay Ýt dĂŻng. §Úi vĂ­i mĂ©t sĂš danh tĂ” bÊt Âź Ă©ng vËt chØ dĂŻng trong 1 sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp thËt ¼Æc biÖt khi danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ n»m trong cžc th”nh ng Ă·. VÝ dĂŽ: A stone’s throw. - §«i khi Âź Ăši vĂ­i nh Ă·ng danh tĂ” chØ n ÂŹi chĂšn hoÆc ¼Þa Âź iÓm chØ cÇn dĂŻng sĂ« h Ă·u cžch cho danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ m” kh«ng cÇn danh tĂ” theo sau. VÝ dĂŽ: At the hairdresser’s At the butcher’s 1. 6 S o m e , an y so m e v” a n y nghÜa l” “1 sĂš hoÆc 1 lĂźng nhÊt ¼Þnh”. ChĂłng Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng vĂ­i (hoÆc thay thÕ) cžc danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu hoÆc danh tĂ” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc.
  • 17. + So m e l” dÂčng sĂš nhiÒu cña a/ a n v” o n e : VÝ dĂŽ: Have a biscuit/some biscuits. I ate a date/ some dates. + so m e, a n y of + th e/ this/ th es e/ thos e/ ÂźÂči tĂ” riÂȘn g/ ÂźÂči tĂ” s Ă« h Ă· u. VÝ dĂŽ: Some of the staff can speak Japaneses. Did any of your photos come out well? + so m e Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng vĂ­i : - Cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thÓ khÂŒng ¼Þnh. VÝ dĂŽ: They bought some honey. - Trong cžc c ©u hĂĄi m” cĂŁ c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi l” ‘yes’. VÝ dĂŽ: Did some of you sleep on the floor? ( NgĂȘi nĂŁi chĂȘ Ÿßi c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi l” yes) - Trong cžc c ©u ¼Ò nghÞ v” yÂȘu cÇu: VÝ dĂŽ: Would you like some wine? Could you do some typing for me? + a n y Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng: - VĂ­i Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thÓ phñ ¼Þnh VÝ dĂŽ: I haven’t any matches. - VĂ­i h ar dly, b ar ely, scar ely ( cžc phĂŁ tĂ” n”y ¼Òu mang nghÜa phñ ¼Þnh) VÝ dĂŽ: I have hardly any spare time. - VĂ­i witho ut khi witho ut a n y ... = with n o ... VÝ dĂŽ: He crossed the frontier without any difficulty/ with no difficulty. - VĂ­i cžc c ©u hĂĄi Have you got any fish? Did he catch any fish? - Sau if/ whether cžc th”nh ng Ă· mang tÝnh nghi ngĂȘ. VÝ dĂŽ: If you need any more money, please let me know. I don’t think there is any petrol in the tank. 2. §éng tĂ” ( v er b) §éng tĂ” trong tiÕng Anh chia l”m 3 thĂȘi chÝnh: - Quž khĂž.
  • 18. - HiÖn tÂči. - TÂŹ ng lai. Mçi thĂȘi chÝnh lÂči chia ra l”m nhiÒu thĂȘi nhĂĄ ¼Ó xžc ¼Þnh chÝnh xžc thĂȘi gian cña h”nh Âź Ă©ng. 2. 1 Hi Ö n tÂči (pr e s e n t) 2.1.1 HiÖntÂči Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n (simple present) Khi chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt, ph¶i cĂŁ s Ă« Âź u«i v” vÇn Âź ĂŁ ph¶i Âź Ăźc Âź Ă€c lÂȘn. VÝ dĂŽ: John walks to school everyday. - NĂŁ dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng x¶y ra Ă« thĂȘi Âź iÓm hiÖn tÂči, kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ vÒ mÆt thĂȘi gian v” h”nh Âź Ă©ng lÆp Âź i lÆp lÂči cĂŁ tÝnh quy luËt. - NĂŁ thĂȘng dĂŻng vĂ­i 1 sĂš phĂŁ tĂ” nh: now, present day, nowadays. §Æc biÖt l”1 sĂš phĂŁ tĂ” chØ tÇn suÊt hoÂčt Âź Ă©ng: often, sometimes, always, frequently. VÝ dĂŽ: They understand the problem now. Henry always swims in the evening. (thĂŁi quen) We want to leave now. Your cough sounds bad. 2.1.2 HiÖn tÂči tiÕp diÔn (present progressive) am Subject + is + [verb + ing ]... are - NĂŁ dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź ang x¶y ra Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči. ThĂȘi gian Âź Ăźc xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ b»ng cžc phĂŁ tĂ” nh now, right now, presently. - NĂŁ dĂŻng ¼Ó thay thÕ cho thĂȘi tÂŹ ng lai gÇn. VÝ dĂŽ: He is learning in the US. L u Ăœ : §Ó ph ©n biÖt tÂŹ ng lai gÇn v” h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź ang x¶y ra cÇn cšn cĂž v”o phĂŁ tĂ” trong c ©u) VÝ dĂŽ: The committee members are examining the material now. ( hiÖn tÂči Âź ang kiÓm tra) George is leaving for France tomorrow. (tÂŹ ng lai gÇn - sÏ rĂȘi tĂ­i Phžp v”o ng”y mai)
  • 19. 2.1.3 Present perfect ( hiÖn tÂči ho”n th”nh) Have + P2 - DĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź · x¶y ra trong 1 quž khĂž kÐo d”i v” chÊm dĂžt Ă« hiÖn tÂči. ThĂȘi gian trong c ©u ho”n to”n kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh. - ChØ 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng x¶y ra nhiÒu lÇn trong quž khĂž kÐo d”i tĂ­i hiÖn tÂči. - DĂŻng vĂ­i 2 giĂ­i tĂ” for v” since + thĂȘi gian. - DĂŻng vĂ­i already trong c ©u khÂŒng ¼Þnh, already cĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng sau have nhng nĂŁ cĂČng cĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng cuĂši c ©u. have Subject + + already + P2 has VÝ dĂŽ: We have already written our reports. I have already read the entire book. Sam has already recorded the results of the experiment. - DĂŻng vĂ­i yet trong c ©u phñ ¼Þnh v” c ©u nghi vÊn phñ ¼Þnh, yet thĂȘng xuyÂȘn ŸÞng Ă« cuĂši c ©u, c«ng thĂžc sau: have Subject + not + P2 ... + yet ... has VÝ dĂŽ: John hasn’t written his report yet. The president hasn’t decided what to do yet. We haven’t called on our teacher yet. - Trong 1 sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp yet cĂŁ thÓ Âź ¶o lÂȘn ŸÞng sau to have v” ng Ă· phžp cĂŁ thay Âź ĂŠi. Not mÊt Âź i v” ph ©n tĂ” 2 trĂ« vÒ dÂčng nguyÂȘn thÓ cĂŁ to. have Subject + + yet + [verb in simple form] ... has VÝ dĂŽ: John has yet to learn the material. = John hasn’t learned the material yet. We have yet to decide what to do with the money. = We haven’t decided what to do with the money yet.
  • 20. ChĂł Ăœ: CÈn thËn sö dĂŽng yet trong mÉu c ©u kÎo nhÇm vĂ­i yet trong mÉu c ©u cĂŁ yet l”m tĂ” nĂši mang nghÜa “nhng” VÝ dĂŽ: I don’t have the money, yet I really need the computer. My neighbors never have the time, yet they always want to do something on Saturday nights. 2.1.4 HiÖn tÂči ho”n th”nh tiÕp diÔn ( preset perfect progressive) Have been + verbing. - DĂŻng giĂšng hÖt nh present perfect nhng h”nh Âź Ă©ng kh«ng chÊm dĂžt Ă« hiÖn tÂči m” vÉn Âź ang tiÕp tĂŽc x¶y ra. NĂŁ thĂȘng xuyÂȘn Âź Ăźc dĂŻng vĂ­i 2 giĂ­i tĂ” for, since + time. VÝ dĂŽ: John has been living in the same house for ten years. = John has live in the same house for ten years. MĂ©t s Ăš thÝ d ĂŽ Jorge has already walked to school. (thĂȘi gian kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh) He has been to California three times. (h ÂŹn 1 lÇn) Mary has seen this movie before. (thĂȘi gian kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh) They have been at home all day. We haven’t gone to the store yet. (thĂȘi gian kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh). John has worked in Washington for three years. HoÆc John has been working in Washington for three years. (vÉn cha kÕt thĂłc - John vÉn Âź ang l”m viÖc Ă« Washington). Ph © n biÖt c žch dĂŻn g gi Ă· a 2 th ĂȘi Present perfect Present perfect progressive ‱ H”nh Âź Ă©ng chÊm dĂžt Ă« hiÖn tÂči, do Âź ĂŁ cĂŁ kÕt qu¶ rĂą rÖt. VÝ dĂŽ: I have waited for you for half an hour (now I stop waiting) ‱ H”nh Âź Ă©ng vÉn tiÕp tĂŽc tiÕp diÔn ĂĄ hiÖn tÂči do vËy kh«ng cĂŁ kÕt qu¶ rĂą rÖt. VÝ dĂŽ: I have been waiting for you for half an hour.
  • 21. (and continue waiting hoping that you will come) 2. 2 Q už k h Ăž ( Pa st) 2.2.1 Quž khĂž Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n (simple past) Verb + ed - MĂ©t sĂš Âź Ă©ng tĂ” trong tiÕng Anh cĂŁ quž khĂž ¼Æc biÖt v” Âź Ă„ng thĂȘi cĂČng cĂŁ ph ©n tĂ” 2 ¼Æc biÖt. - MĂ©t sĂš cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cĂŁ c¶ 2 dÂčng: VÝ dĂŽ: Light - lighted - lighted lit - lit NgĂȘi Anh a dĂŻng quž khĂž thĂȘng khi chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” ph ©n tĂ” 2 ¼Æc biÖt. VÝ dĂŽ: He lighted the candle on his birthday cake. NĂŁ thŸp ngĂ€n nÕn trÂȘn chiÕc bžnh sinh nhËt Nhng I can see the lit house from a distance. T«i cĂŁ thÓ nh ×n thÊy tĂ” xa ng«i nh” sžng žnh Âź iÖn. ‱ NĂŁ dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź · x¶y ra dĂžt Âź iÓm trong quž khĂž, kh«ng liÂȘn quan g × tĂ­i hiÖn tÂči. ‱ ThĂȘi gian h”nh Âź Ă©ng trong c ©u l” rÊt rĂą r”ng, nĂŁ th ĂȘng dĂŻng vĂ­i mĂ©t sĂš phĂŁ tĂ” chØ thĂȘi gian nh: yesterday, at that moment, last + thĂȘi gian nh: Last night month week vv... Lu Ăœ: NÕu thĂȘi gian trong c ©u l” kh«ng rĂą r”ng th × ph¶i dĂŻng present perfect. VÝ dĂŽ: John went to Spain last year. Bob bought a new bicycle yesterday. Maria did her homework last night. Mark washed the dishes after dinner. We drove to grocery store this afternoon. George cooked dinner for his family Saturday night.
  • 22. 2.2.2 Quž khĂž tiÕp diÔn (Past progresive). Was / were + Ving - NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź ang x¶y ra Ă« v”o 1 thĂȘi Âź iÓm nhÊt ¼Þnh trong quž khĂž kh«ng liÂȘn hÖ g × tĂ­i hiÖn tÂči. ThĂȘi Âź iÓm trong c ©u Âź Ăźc xžc ¼Þnh b»ng cžc phĂŁ tĂ” chØ thĂȘi gian nh: At + thĂȘi gian quž khĂž. VÝ dĂŽ: He was eating dinner at 7 P.M Last night. - NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng kÕt hĂźp vĂ­i 1 simple past th«ng qua 2 liÂȘn tĂ” When v” while ¼Ó chØ 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź ang x¶y ra trong quž khĂž th × 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng khžc Âź Ă©t ngĂ©t xen v”o (tÂŹ ng Âź ÂŹ ng vĂ­i c ©u TiÕng ViÖt “ Khi Âź ang ... th × bçng”). * Subject1 + simple past + while + subject 2 + past progressive. VÝ dĂŽ: Somebody hit him on the head while he was going to his car. Subject1 + past progressive + when + subject 2 + simple past. VÝ dĂŽ: He was going to his car when someone hit him on the head. Lu Ăœ: MÖnh ¼Ò cĂŁ when v” while cĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng bÊt kĂș n ÂŹi n”o trong c ©u nh ng sau when nhÊt thiÕt ph¶i l” 1 simple past v” sau while nhÊt thiÕt ph¶i l” 1 past progressive. - DĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 2 h”nh Âź Ă©ng song song cĂŻng 1 lĂłc, nĂši vĂ­i nhau b»ng liÂȘn tĂ” while. Subject1 + past progressive + while + subject 2 + past progressive. VÝ dĂŽ: He was reading newspaper while his wife was preparing the dinner in the kitchen. ( MÖnh ¼Ò kh«ng cĂŁ while cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc chuyÓn sang simple past nhng hiÕm khi v × sĂź nhÇm lÉn vĂ­i *) VÝ dĂŽ: Jose was writing a letter to his family when his pencil broke. While Joan was writing the report, Henry was looking for more information.
  • 23. When Mark arrived, the Johnsons was having dinner, but they stopped in order to talk to him. 2.2.3 Quž khĂž ho”n th”nh (past perfect). Had + P2 - DĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng x¶y ra tr Ă­c 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng khžc trong quž khĂž. (trong c ©u bao giĂȘ cĂČng cĂŁ 2 h”nh Âź Ă©ng: 1 tr Ă­c v” 1 sau. - DĂŻng kÕt hĂźp vĂ­i 1 simple past th«ng qua 2 giĂ­i tĂ” chØ thĂȘi gian before v” after. Subject + past perfect + before + subject + past simple VÝ dĂŽ: I had gone to the store before I went home. The professor had reviewed the material before he gave the quiz. Before Ali went to sleep, he had called his family. George had worked at the university for forty-five years before he retired. The doctor had examined the patient thoroughly before he prescribed the medication. Subject + past simple + after + subject + past perfect VÝ dĂŽ: John went home after he had gone to the store. After the committee members had considered the consequences, they voted on the proposal. - MÖnh ¼Ò cĂŁ before v” after cĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng ¼Çu hoÆc cuĂši c ©u nhng sau before nhÊt thiÕt ph¶i l” 1 simple past v” sau after nhÊt thiÕt ph¶i l” 1 past perfect. - Before v” after cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc thay b»ng when m” kh«ng sĂź bÞ nhÇm lÉn v × trong c ©u bao giĂȘ cĂČng cĂŁ 2 h”nh Âź Ă©ng: 1 trĂ­c v” 1 sau. VÝ dĂŽ: The police cars came to the scene when the robbers had gone away. ( trong c ©u n”y when cĂŁ nghÜa l” after v × sau when l” past perfect.)
  • 24. 2.2.4 Quž khĂž ho”n th”nh tiÕp diÔn (past perfect progressive). Subject + had + been + [Verb + ing]... NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng giĂšng hÖt nh past perfect nhng h”nh Âź Ă©ng kh«ng dĂ”ng lÂči m” tiÕp tĂŽc tiÕp diÔn cho ¼Õn thĂȘi Âź iÓm simple past. NĂŁ thĂȘng Âź Ăźc kÕt hĂźp vĂ­i 1 simple past th«ng qua phĂŁ tĂ” before. Trong c ©u thĂȘng cĂŁ since hoÆc for + thĂȘi gian. - ThĂȘi n”y hiÖn nay Ýt dĂŻng v” Âź Ăźc thay thÕ b»ng past perfect. VÝ dĂŽ: Henry had been living in New York for ten years before he moved to California. George had been working at the university for forty-five years before he retired. 2. 3 TÂŹ n g lai 2.3.1 TÂŹ ng lai Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n (simple future) Will / shall + [ Verb in simple form ] Can / may. - Ng”y nay ng Ă· phžp hiÖn Âź Âči, ¼Æc biÖt l” MĂŒ dĂŻng will cho tÊt c¶ cžc ng«i cßn shall chØ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng trong cžc trĂȘng hĂźp sau: ‱ MĂȘi mĂ€c ngĂȘi khžc 1 cžch lÞch sĂč. VÝ dĂŽ: Shall we go out for lunch? Shall I take your coat? ‱ §Ò nghÞ giĂłp ŸÏ ngĂȘi khžc 1 cžch lÞch sĂč. VÝ dĂŽ: Shall I give you a hand with these packages. ‱ DĂŻng ¼Ó ng· giž khi mua bžn, mÆc c¶. VÝ dĂŽ: Shall we say : fifteen dollars? - NĂŁ dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng sÏ x¶y ra Ă« v”o thĂȘi Âź iÓm nhÊt ¼Þnh trong tÂŹ ng lai. ThĂȘi Âź iÓm n”y kh«ng Âź Ăźc xžc ¼Þnh rĂą rÖt. Cžc phĂŁ tĂ” thĂȘng dĂŻng l” tomorrow, next + thĂȘi gian, in the future. Near future. (tÂŹ ng lai gÇn)
  • 25. To be going to do smth - sŸp l”m g ×. - DĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng sÏ x¶y ra trong 1 t ÂŹ ng lai gÇn, thĂȘi gian sÏ Âź Ăźc diÔn Âź Âčt b»ng 1 sĂš phĂŁ tĂ” nh : in a moment (lžt n Ă·a), tomorrow. VÝ dĂŽ: We are going to have a meeting in a moment. We are going to get to the airport at 9 am this morning. - Ng”y nay, ¼Æc biÖt l” trong všn nĂŁi ngĂȘi ta thĂȘng dĂŻng Present progressive ¼Ó thay thÕ. - DĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 sĂč viÖc chŸc chŸn sÏ x¶y ra dĂŻ r»ng kh«ng ph¶i l” t ÂŹ ng lai gÇn. VÝ dĂŽ: Next year we are going to take a TOEFL test for the score that enables us to learn in the US. 2.3.2 TÂŹ ng lai tiÕp diÔn ( future progressive) Will / shall + be + [ verb + ing ] Can / may. - NĂŁ diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng sÏ Âź ang x¶y ra Ă« 1 thĂȘi Âź iÓm nhÊt ¼Þnh cña t ÂŹ ng lai. ThĂȘi Âź iÓm n”y Âź Ăźc xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ b»ng ng”y, giĂȘ. VÝ dĂŽ: I will be doing a test on Monday morning next week. - NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng kÕt hĂźp vĂ­i 1 present progressive ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 2 h”nh Âź Ă©ng song song x¶y ra, 1 Ă« hiÖn tÂči, 1 Ă« t ÂŹ ng lai. VÝ dĂŽ: Now we are learning English here but by the time tomorrow we will be working at the office. 2.3.3 TÂŹ ng lai ho”n th”nh (future perfect) Will have + P2 - NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 h”nh Âź Ă©ng sÏ ph¶i Âź Ăźc ho”n tÊt Ă« 1 thĂȘi Âź iÓm n”o Âź ĂŁ trong tÂŹ ng lai. ThĂȘi Âź iÓm n”y thĂȘng Âź Ăźc diÔn Âź Âčt b»ng : by the end of, by tomorrow. VÝ dĂŽ: We will have taken a TOEFL test by the end of this year. Lu Ăœ : ThĂȘi n”y ph¶i cĂŁ lĂœ do ¼Æc biÖt mĂ­i sö dĂŽng.
  • 26. 3. SĂč ho ” hĂźp gi Ă· a chñ n g Ă· v ” Âź Ă© n g tĂ”. Th«ng thĂȘng th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ŸÞng liÒn ngay vĂ­i chñ ng Ă· v” ph¶i chia theo ng«i chñ ng Ă·. Song cĂŁ nh Ă·ng trĂȘng hĂźp kh«ng ph¶i nh vËy. 3. 1 Chñ n g Ă· Âź Ăž n g tžc h k hĂĄi Âź Ă© n g t Ă”. - §Þng xen v”o gi Ă·a chñ ng Ă· v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” l” 1 ng Ă· giĂ­i tĂ” ( 1 giĂ­i tĂ” mĂ« ¼Çu kÕt hĂźp vĂ­i cžc danh tĂ” theo sau). Ng Ă· giĂ­i tĂ” n”y kh«ng quyÕt ¼Þnh g × ¼Õn viÖc chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. §éng tĂ” ph¶i chia theo chñ ng Ă· chÝnh. Subject + [ng Ă· giĂ­i tĂ”] + verb VÝ dĂŽ: The study of languages is very interesting. Singular subject singular verb Several theories on this subject have been proposed. Plural subject plural verb The view of these disciplines varies from time to time. Singular subject singular verb The danger of forest fires is not to be taken lightly. Singular subject singular verb The effects of that crime are likely to be devastating. Plural subject plural verb The fear of rape and robbery has caused many people to flee the cities. Singular subject singular verb - Cžc th”nh ng Ă· trong b¶ng dĂ­i Âź © y cĂŻng vĂ­i cžc danh tĂ” Âź i Âź »ng sau nĂŁ tÂčo nÂȘn hiÖn tĂźng Âź Ă„ng chñ ng Ă·. CĂŽm Âź Ă„ng chñ ng Ă· n”y ph¶i ŸÞng tžch biÖt ra khĂĄi chñ ng Ă· chÝnh v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” b»ng 2 dÊu phÈy v” kh«ng cĂŁ ¶nh h Ă«ng g × tĂ­i viÖc chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. Together with along with accompanied by as well as VÝ dĂŽ: The actress, along with her manager and some friends, is going to a party tonight. Singular subject singular verb Mr. Robbins, accompanied by his wife and children, is arriving tonight. Singular subject singular verb L u Ăœ : - NÕu 2 Âź Ă„ng chñ ng Ă· nĂši vĂ­i nhau b»ng liÂȘn tĂ” and th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” lËp tĂžc ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu (they). VÝ dĂŽ:
  • 27. The actress and her manager are going to a party tonight. - nhng nÕu 2 Âź Ă„ng chñ ng Ă· nĂši vĂ­i nhau b»ng liÂȘn tĂ” or th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sÏ ph¶i chia theo danh tĂ” ŸÞng sau or. NÕu Âź ĂŁ l” danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt th × ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt v” ngĂźc lÂči. VÝ dĂŽ: The actress or her manager is going to a party tonight. 3. 2 Cžc dan h t Ă” lu«n Âź ß i h ĂĄi Âź Ă© n g t Ă” v ” Âź Âč i t Ă” s Ăš it. §ã l” cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” trong b¶ng sau: any + danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt no + danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt Some + danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt anybody nobody somebody anyone no one someone anything nothing something every + danh tĂ” sĂš it each + danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt everybody everyone either* everything neither* * Either v” either l” sĂš Ýt nÕu nĂŁ kh«ng Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng vĂ­i or v” nor. Lu Ăœ: - either (1 trong 2) chØ dĂŻng cho 2 ngĂȘi, 2 vËt. NÕu 3 ngĂȘi, 3 vËt trĂ« lÂȘn ph¶i dĂŻng any. VÝ dĂŽ: If either of you takes a vacation now, we won’t be able to finish this work. If any of students in this class is absent, he or she must have the permission of the instructor. - Neither (kh«ng 1 trong 2) chØ dĂŻng cho 2 ngĂȘi, 2 vËt. NÕu 3 ngĂȘi, 3 vËt trĂ« lÂȘn ph¶i dĂŻng not any). VÝ dĂŽ: Neither of two his classes gets an “c ” Not any of those pairs of shoes fits me. 3. 3 Cžch s ö d ĂŽ n g n on e, n o none of the : Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng tĂŻy theo danh tĂ” ŸÞng Âź »ng sau nĂŁ. - nÕu danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ l” kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt. None + of the + non-count noun + singular verb
  • 28. VÝ dĂŽ: None of the counterfeit money has been found. - nÕu sau none of the l” 1 danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc sĂš nhiÒu th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu. None + of the + plural noun + plural verb VÝ dĂŽ: None of the students have finished the exam yet. No Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng cĂČng tuĂș theo danh tĂ” ŸÞng sau nĂŁ. - nÕu sau no l” danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt hoÆc kh«ng ¼Õm Âź Ăźc th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt. Singular noun No + + singular verb non-count noun VÝ dĂŽ: No example is relevant to this case. - nhng nÕu sau no l” 1 danh tĂ” ¼Õm Âź Ăźc sĂš nhiÒu th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu. No + plural noun + plural verb VÝ dĂŽ: No examples are relevant to this case. 3. 4 Cžch s ö d ĂŽ n g c Ê u trĂłc eit h e r ... or v ” n eit h e r ... n or. §iÒu cÇn lu Ăœ nhÊt khi sö dĂŽng cÆp th”nh ng Ă· n”y l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau Âź ĂŁ ph¶i chia theo danh tĂ” sau or hoÆc nor. NÕu danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ l” sĂš Ýt th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt v” ngĂźc lÂči. Neither nor + noun + singular noun + singular verb either or VÝ dĂŽ: Neither John nor Bill is going to the beach today.
  • 29. Singular noun singular verb Either John or Bill is going to the beach today. Singular noun singular verb Neither nor + noun + plural noun + plural verb either or VÝ dĂŽ: Neither Maria nor her friends are going to class today. Plural plural Lu Ăœ : Khi chñ ng Ă· l” 1 verbing th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt. 3. 5 Cžc dan h t Ă” t Ë p t h Ó §ã l” nh Ă·ng danh tĂ” trong b¶ng dĂ­i Âź © y dĂŻng ¼Ó chØ mĂ©t nhĂŁm ngĂȘi hoÆc 1 tĂŠ chĂžc. Cho dĂŻ vËy, chĂłng vÉn Âź Ăźc xem l” danh tĂ” sĂš Ýt v” do Âź ĂŁ, cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” Âź Âči tĂ” Âź i cĂŻng vĂ­i chĂłng ph¶i Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt. congress family group committe e class organizati on team army club crowd governme nt jury majority * minority public - NÕu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Âź »ng sau nh Ă·ng danh tĂ” n”y chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu th × nĂŁ ž m chØ cžc th”nh viÂȘn cña tĂŠ chĂžc hoÆc nhĂŁm Âź ĂŁ Âź ang hoÂčt Âź Ă©ng riÂȘng rÏ. VÝ dĂŽ: The congress votes for the bill. The congress are discussing the bill (some agree but some don’t). (TOEFL kh«ng bŸt lçi n”y) * Majority Danh tĂ” n”y Âź Ăźc dĂŻng tuĂș theo danh tĂ” Âź i Âź »ng sau nĂŁ. The majority + singular verb The majority of the plural noun + plural verb. VÝ dĂŽ: The majority believes that we are in no danger. The majority of the students believe him to be innocent.
  • 30. L u Ăœ : Danh tĂ” police lu«n Âź Ăźc coi l” danh tĂ” ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu do vËy Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Âź »ng sau nĂŁ ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu. VÝ dĂŽ: The police come to the crime scene at good time and arrested a suspect. M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ: The committee has met, and it has rejected the proposal. The family was elated by the news. The crowd was wild with excitement. Congress has initiated a new plan to combat inflation. The organization has lost many members this year. Our team is going to win the game. Cžc cĂŽm tĂ” trong b¶ng dĂ­i Âź © y chØ mĂ©t nhĂŁm gia sĂłc Âź Ă©ng vËt cho dĂŻ danh tĂ” Âź »ng sau giĂ­i tĂ” of cĂŁ Ă« sĂš nhiÒu th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau Âź ĂŁ vÉn ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt. flock of birds, sheep herd of cattle pack of dogs school of fish pride of lions VÝ dĂŽ: The flock of birds is circling overhead. The herd of cattle is breaking away. A school of fish is being attacked by sharks. L u Ăœ : TÊt c¶ cžc danh tĂ” tËp hĂźp chØ thĂȘi gian, tiÒn bÂčc, sĂš Âź o ¼Òu ¼ßi hĂĄi cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” - Âź Âči tĂ” - bĂŠ ng Ă· Âź i cĂŻng nĂŁ ph¶i Ă« ng«i sĂš Ýt. (TOEFL bŸt lçi n”y). VÝ dĂŽ: He has contributed $50 and now he wants to contribute another fifty. Twenty-five dollars is too much to pay for that shirt. Fifty minutes isn’t enough time to finish this test. Twenty dollars is all I can afford to pay for that recorder. Two miles is too much to run in one day. 3. 6 Cžch s ö d ĂŽ n g A n u m b e r of/ t h e n u m b e r of a number of + danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu + Âź Ă©ng tĂ”
  • 31. Ă« sĂš nhiÒu - a n u m b e r of : mĂ©t sĂš lĂźng lĂ­n nhĂžng... . §i vĂ­i danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu. - t h e n u m b e r of : mĂ©t sĂš.... §i vĂŁi danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu nhng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i chia Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt. the number of + danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu + Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« sĂš Ýt VÝ dĂŽ: A number of applicants have already been interviewed. The number of residents who have been questioned on this matter is quite small 3. 7 Cžc dan h t Ă” lu«n dĂŻn g Ă« s Ăš n hi Ò u. Cžc danh tĂ” sau Âź © y lu«n ph¶i dĂŻng Ă« dÂčng sĂš nhiÒu. Trousers eyeglasses tongs - cži kÑp shorts scissors- cži kÐo tweezers- cži nhÝp Jeans pants- quÇn pliers - cži k × m VÝ dĂŽ: The pants are in the drawer. A pair of pants is in the drawer. Cžc danh tĂ” trÂȘn thĂȘng xuyÂȘn Ă« dÂčng sĂš nhiÒu v × chĂłng bao gĂ„m 2 thĂčc thÓ, do vËy cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” Âź Âči tĂ” Âź i cĂŻng chĂłng ph¶i Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš nhiÒu. VÝ dĂŽ: The pliers are on the table. These scissors are dull. - NÕu muĂšn biÕn chĂłng th”nh sĂš Ýt dĂŻng a pair of ... v” lĂłc Âź ĂŁ Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” Âź Âči tĂ” Âź i cĂŻng vĂ­i chĂłng ph¶i Ă« ng«i thĂž 3 sĂš Ýt. VÝ dĂŽ: This pair of scissors is dull. The pair of pliers is on the table. 3. 8 Cžch dĂŻn g cžc t h ” n h n g Ă· Th e r e is, t h e r e ar e Th”nh ng Ă· n”y chØ sĂč tĂ„n tÂči cña ngĂȘi hoÆc vËt tÂči 1 n ÂŹi n”o Âź ĂŁ. Ph¶i ph ©n biÖt chĂłng vĂ­i Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to have. There is There are chØ sĂč tĂ„n tÂči (existance)
  • 32. To have chØ sĂč sĂ« h Ă·u (possession) To possess (get, hold instinctively). - Chñ ng Ă· thËt cña th”nh ng Ă· n”y Âź i Âź »ng sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be. NÕu danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ l” sĂš nhiÒu th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” chia Ă« sĂš nhiÒu v” ngĂźc lÂči. - MĂ€i biÕn Âź ĂŠi vÒ thĂȘi v” thÓ ¼Òu nh»m v”o Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be cßn ph ©n tĂ” 2 th × dĂča v”o trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to have/ has been. there is there was + singular subject ... there has been ( hoÆc non- count) there are there were + singular subject ... there have been ( hoÆc non- count) VÝ dĂŽ: There is a storm approaching. singular singular There have been a number of telephone calls today. Plural plural There was an accident last night. singular singular There were too many people at the party. Plural plural There has been an increase in the importation of foreign cars. Plural plural There was water on the floor where he fell. Plural non-count 4. §Âči tĂ” §Âči tĂ” trong tiÕng Anh chia 5 loÂči cĂŁ cžc chĂžc nšng riÂȘng biÖt. 4. 1 §Âči t Ă” n h © n xn g c h ñ n g Ă· ( S u bj e c t pr on o u n) GĂ„m : I we you you he they she it ChĂžc nšng:
  • 33. - §Þng ¼Çu c ©u l”m chñ ng Ă· trong c ©u v” quyÕt ¼Þnh viÖc chia Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. - §Þng Âź »ng sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be. VÝ dĂŽ: The teachers who were invited to the party were George, Batty. - §Þng Âź »ng sau cžc phĂŁ tĂ” so sžnh nh than, as. TuyÖt Âź Ăši kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng Âź Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng t ©n ng Ă· trong trĂȘng hĂźp n”y. VÝ dĂŽ: He is taller than I (am) - kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng me. She is as beautiful as my girlfriend. - §Úi vĂ­i cžc Âź Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng chñ ng Ă· nh we, you v” Âź Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng t ©n ng Ă· nh us cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng 1 danh tĂ” sĂš nhiÒu ngay sau Âź ĂŁ. VÝ dĂŽ: We students, you teachers, us workers. Cžc Âź Âči tĂ” nh all, both cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng theo lĂši n”y vĂ­i cžc ng«i sĂš nhiÒu. we you all/ both they VÝ dĂŽ: I am going to the store. We have lived here for twenty years. It was she who called you. (sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” be) George and I would like to leave now. We students are going to have a party. 4. 2 §Âči t Ă” n h © n xn g t © n n g Ă· me us you you him them her it - nĂŁ ŸÞng ngay sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” hoÆc cžc giĂ­i tĂ” l”m nhiÖm vĂŽ cña mĂ©t t ©n ng Ă·. - Âź Ăši vĂ­i cžc ng«i Âź Âči tĂ” nh ©n xng t ©n ng Ă· Ă« sĂš nhiÒu cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng all hoÆc both ngay sau Âź ĂŁ. us you all / both them VÝ dĂŽ: They called us on the phone. complement The teacher gave him a bad grade.
  • 34. complement John told her a story. complement The policeman was looking for him. sau giĂ­i tĂ” To us, it seems like a good bargain sau giĂ­i tĂ” L u Ăœ : NÂȘn nhĂ­ r»ng nhiÒu giĂ­i tĂ” cĂŁ thÓ cĂŁ chĂžc nšng nh cžc th”nh phÇn khžc trong c ©u, chÂŒng hÂčn nh phĂŁ tĂ” hoÆc liÂȘn tĂ”. V× vËy, ta cÇn ph¶i xžc ¼Þnh cžc xem chĂłng Âź ĂŁng vai trß g × - cÇn dĂča v”o ng Ă· c¶nh chĂž kh«ng ph¶i dĂča v”o sĂč hiÓu biÕt b ×nh thĂȘng vÒ chĂžc nšng cña chĂłng. VÝ dĂŽ: Janet will make her presentation after him. preposition complement pronoun Janet will make her presentation after he finishes his speech. conjunction subject pronoun clause ( mĂ©t mÖnh ¼Ò (clause) gĂ„m 1 chñ ng Ă· v” 1 Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. Trong mÖnh ¼Ò trÂȘn, he l” chñ ng Ă· v” finishes l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ”). 4. 3 TÝn h t Ă” s Ă« h Ă· u my our your your his her their its - NĂŁ ŸÞng ngay trĂ­c danh tĂ” v” chØ sĂč sĂ« h Ă·u cña ngĂȘi hoÆc vËt Âź Ăši vĂ­i danh tĂ” ŸÞng Âź »ng sau. VÝ dĂŽ: John is eating his dinner. This is not my book. The cat has injured its foot. The boy broke his arm yesterday.. She forgot her homework this morning. My food is cold. L u Ăœ : Its khžc vĂ­i It’s. It’s cĂŁ nghÜa l” it is hoÆc it has. 4. 4 §Âči t Ă” s Ă« h Ă· u mine ours yours yours his
  • 35. hers theirs its - DĂŻng ¼Ó thay thÕ cho tÝnh tĂ” sĂ« h Ă·u v” danh tĂ” Âź · Âź Ăźc nhŸc ¼Õn Ă« trÂȘn. possessive pronoun + possessive adjective + noun - NĂŁ cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc ŸÞng l”m chñ ng Ă· trong c©u. - §Þng Âź »ng sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be. - NĂŁ cĂŁ thÓ l”m t ©n ng Ă· khi Âź i sau 1 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” hoÆc sau 1 giĂ­i tĂ”. Do you remember to take your money? - §Þng Âź »ng sau cžc phĂŁ tĂ” so sžnh nh than, as. Your book is as good as mine. M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ: This is my book = This is mine. Your teacher is the same as his teacher = Yours is as the same as his. Her dress is green and my dress is red = Hers is green is green and mine is red. Our books are heavy = Ours are heavy. Their coasts are too small. Theirs are too small. I forgot my homework = I forgot mine. 4. 5 §Âči t Ă” p h¶n t h © n (r efl exiv e pron o un) myself ourselves yourself yourselves himself themselves herself itself L u Ăœ : Ă« cžc ng«i sĂš nhiÒu, Âź u«i - self biÕn th”nh - selves. Ch Ăžc nšn g: - ChØ chñ ng Ă· l”m viÖc g × Âź ĂŁ cho chÝnh m ×nh. Trong tr ĂȘng hĂźp n”y nĂŁ ŸÞng ngay sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” hoÆc ŸÞng Ă« cuĂši c ©u sau giĂ­i tĂ” for hoÆc to. VÝ dĂŽ: He sent the letter to himself. You can see the differences for yourselves.
  • 36. - ChØ chñ ng Ă· tĂč th ©n l”m lÊy 1 viÖc g ×. Trong trĂȘng hĂźp n”y nĂŁ ŸÞng Âź »ng sau chñ ng Ă· hoÆc cuĂši c ©u khi nĂŁi. VÝ dĂŽ: I myself believe that the proposal is good. He himself set out to break the long distance flying record. She prepared the nine-course meal herself. The students themselves decorated the room. You yourself must do this homework. John himself bought this gifts. By + o n e-s elf = alon e. VÝ dĂŽ: John washed the dishes by himself = John washed the dishes alone. 5. §éng tĂ” dĂŻn g l” m t©n n g Ă· - Kh«ng ph¶i bÊt cĂž Âź Ă©ng tĂ” n”o trong tiÕng Anh cĂČng ¼ßi hĂĄi 1 danh tĂ” hoÆc Âź Âči tĂ” theo sau nĂŁ l”m t ©n ng Ă·. CĂŁ mĂ©t sĂš Âź Ă©ng tĂ” lÂči yÂȘu cÇu t ©n ng Ă· sau nĂŁ ph¶i l” mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khžc. ChĂłng chia l”m 2 loÂči sau: 5. 1 §én g t Ă” n g u y ÂȘ n t h Ó l” m t © n n g Ă· B¶ng sau l” nh Ă·ng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼ßi hĂĄi t ©n ng Ă· sau nĂŁ ph¶i l” mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khžc. ChĂłng tu ©n theo mÉu c ©u nh sau: agree to do something. desire to do something. decide to do something. agree desire hope plan strive attemp t expect intend prepar e tend claim fail learn preten d want decid e forget need refuse wish deman d hesitat e offer seem VÝ dĂŽ: John expects to begin studying law next semester. Mary learned to swim when she was very young. The budget committee decided to postpone this meeting. The president will attempt to reduce inflation in the next your years. The soldiers are preparing to attack a village. Cynthia has agreed to act as a liaison between the two countries.
  • 37. 5. 2 Vin g dĂŻn g l” m t © n n g Ă· - B¶ng sau l” 1 sĂš cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼ßi hĂĄi t ©n ng Ă· sau nĂŁ l” 1 Ving theo cžc mÉu c ©u sau: admit doing something (thĂł nhËn l”m g ×) VÝ dĂŽ: He admitted having done wrong. Enjoy doing something (thÝch thĂł khi l”m Âź iÒu g ×) admit delay miss report suggest appreciat e deny postpone resent avoid enjoy practice resist can’t help finish quit resume conside r mind recall risk L u Ăœ : Trong b¶ng trÂȘn cĂŁ mÉu Âź Ă©ng tĂ”: can’t help can’t resist VÝ dĂŽ: With such good oranges, we can’t help (resist) buying 2 kilos at a time. L u Ăœ : NÕu muĂšn ¼Æt phñ ¼Þnh cho cžc tr ĂȘng hĂźp n”y ¼Æt not trĂ­c nguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to hoÆc Ving. TuyÖt Âź Ăši kh«ng Âź Ăźc cÊu tÂčo dÂčng phñ ¼Þnh cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” chÝnh. VÝ dĂŽ: John decided not to by the car. We regretted not going to the party last night. M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ: John admitted stealing the jewels. We enjoy seeing them again after so many years. You shouldn’t risk entering that building in its present condition. Michael was considering buying a new car until the price went up. The Coast Guard reported seeing another ship in the Florida Straits. Would you mind not smoking in this office? * Cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« b¶ng sau l” nh Ă·ng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” m” t ©n ng Ă· cña chĂłng cĂŁ thÓ l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ hay Ving m” ng Ă· nghÜa cña chĂłng kh«ng thay Âź ĂŠi. VÝ dĂŽ: begin to do smth = begin doing smth. + (against) doing smth : kh«ng thÓ dĂ”ng Âź Ăźc, kh«ng thÓ nhÞn Âź Ăźc ...
  • 38. begin hate regret can’t stand like start continu e love try dread prefer L u Ăœ: Trong b¶ng trÂȘn cĂŁ mÉu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” : to do smth doing smth VÝ dĂŽ: waiting such a long time. to wait such a long time. I hate to ride her bicycle to school = I hate riding her bicycle to school. 5. 3 3 Âź Ă© n g t Ă” Âź Æ c bi Ö t §ã l” cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” m” ng Ă· nghÜa cña chĂłng thay Âź ĂŠi khi t ©n ng Ă· sau nĂŁ l” 1 nguyÂȘn thÓ hoÆc 1 Ving. Stop to do smth : dĂ”ng lÂči ¼Ó l”m g ×. VÝ dĂŽ: He stops to get gasoline. Stop doing smth : dĂ”ng viÖc g × Âź ang l”m lÂči. VÝ dĂŽ: He stops writing and goes out. Remember to do smth : nhĂ­ sÏ ph¶i l”m g ×. VÝ dĂŽ: I remember to send a letter at the post office. Remember doing smth : nhĂ­ Âź · l”m g ×. VÝ dĂŽ: I remember locking the door before leaving but I can’t find the key. Forget to do smth : quÂȘn sÏ ph¶i l”m g ×. VÝ dĂŽ: He forgets to call his friend this afternoon. Forget doing smth : quÂȘn Âź · l”m g ×. VÝ dĂŽ: I forget doing the homework yesterday. L u Ăœ : §éng tĂ” forget trong mÉu c ©u mang nghÜa phñ ¼Þnh. I forget getting to the airport to meet my girl-friend this morning. ( Kh«ng thÓ chÞu Âź Ăčng Âź Ăźc khi ph¶i l”m g ×) can’t stand I can’t stand
  • 39. 5. 4 Cžc Âź Ă© n g t Ă” Âź Ăž n g Âź » n g s a u giĂ­i t Ă” - TÊt c¶ cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ŸÞng Âź »ng sau giĂ­i tĂ” ¼Òu ph¶i Ă« dÂčng Ving. verb adj. + preposition + Ving noun §én g t Ă” + giĂ­i t Ă” + Ving B¶ng sau gĂ„m cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” + giĂ­i tĂ”. approve of: tžn th”nh give up: tĂ” bĂĄ rely on: phĂŽ thuĂ©c v”o worry about: lo lŸng vÒ be better off: insist on: n”i nØ succeed in: th”nh c«ng trong count on = rely on keep on = continue think about think of depend on put off: tr × ho·n Dan h t Ă” + giĂ­i t Ă” + Ving (b¶n g s a u) possibility of choice of method of intention of method for excuse for reason for VÝ dĂŽ: George has no excuse for dropping out of school. There is a possibility of acquiring this property at a good price. There is no reason for leaving this early. Connie has developed a method for evaluating this problem. TÝnh t Ă” + giĂ­i t Ă” + Ving (b¶n g s a u) accustomed to intent on afraid of interested in capable of successful in fond of tired of VÝ dĂŽ: Mitch is afraid of getting married now. We are accustomed to sleeping late on weekends. Jean is not capable of understanding the predicament. Alvaro is intent on finishing school next year. Craig is fond of dancing. We are interested in seeing this film.
  • 40. - Kh«ng ph¶i bÊt cĂž tÝnh tĂ” n”o trong tiÕng Anh cĂČng ¼ßi hĂĄi Âź Ÿng sau nĂŁ ph¶i l” 1 giĂ­i tĂ”, cĂŁ mĂ©t sĂš tÝnh tĂ” lÂči ¼ßi hĂĄi Âź »ng sau nĂŁ l” mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ (xem b¶ng sau). anxious eager: hžo hĂžc pleased usual boring easy prepare d commo n dangero us good ready difficult hard strang e able* eager to do smth: hžo hĂžc l”m g ×. hard to do smth : khĂŁ l”m g ×. * able : able capable unable incapable VÝ dĂŽ: These students are not yet able to handle such difficult problems. These students are not yet capable of handling such difficult problems. M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ: Mohammad is eager to see his family. It is dangerous to drive in this weather We are ready to leave now. It is difficult to pass this test. It is uncommon to find such good crops in this section of the country. Ritsuko was pleased to be admitted to the college. L u Ăœ: - MĂ©t sĂš cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” tiÕng Anh th ĂȘng cĂŁ giĂ­i tĂ” Âź i kÌm Ă« phÝa sau. Kh«ng Âź Ăźc nhÇm lÉn giĂ­i tĂ” Âź ĂŁ vĂ­i to cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ. ChÂŒng hÂčn mĂ©t sĂš Âź Ă©ng tĂ” trong b¶ng sau: object to: ph¶n Âź Ăši look forward to : mong Ÿßi confess to : thĂł nhËn Âź · l”m g × VÝ dĂŽ: John gave up smoking because of his doctor’s advice. Mary insisted on taking the bus instead of the plane. Fred confessed to stealing the jewels. We are not looking forward to going back to school. Henry is thinking of going to France in August. You would be better off leaving now instead of tomorrow. to do smth = of doing smth
  • 41. 5. 5 VÊn Âź Ò Âź Âč i t Ă” Âź i tr Ă­c Âź Ă© n g t Ă” n g u y ÂȘ n t h Ó h o Æ c Vin g l” m t © n n g Ă· . - §Þng trĂ­c 1 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ l”m t ©n ng Ă· th × dÂčng cña Âź Âči tĂ” ph¶i l” t ©n ng Ă·. Pronoun Subject + verb + complement form + [ to + verb] ... noun Sau Âź © y l” b¶ng cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ¼ßi hĂĄi Âź Âči tĂ” (hay danh tĂ” ) Âź i sau nĂŁ ph¶i Ă« dÂčng t ©n ng Ă·. allow invite remind ask order urge beg permi t want convinc e persuad e expect instruct prepare promise VÝ dĂŽ: Joe asked Mary to call him when he woke up. We ordered him to appear in court. I urge you to consider your decision. They were trying to persuade him to change his mind. The teacher permitted them to turn their assignments in late. You should prepare your son to take this examination. Tuy nhiÂȘn, ŸÞng trĂ­c 1 Ving l”m t ©n ng Ă· th × dÂčng cña danh tĂ” hoÆc Âź Âči tĂ” ph¶i Ă« dÂčng sĂ« h Ă·u. dÂčng sĂ« h Ă·u cña danh tĂ” Chñ ng Ă· + Âź Ă©ng tĂ” + + [verb + ing] ... tÝnh tĂ” sĂ« h Ă·u VÝ dĂŽ: We understand your not being able to stay longer. He regrets her leaving. We are looking forward to their coming next year. We don’t approve of John’s buying this house. We resent the teacher’s not announcing the test sooner. We object to their calling at this hour.
  • 42. 6. Cžch sö dĂŽn g Âź Ă© n g tĂ” b ž n khiÕ m khuy Õt n e e d v ” d ar e 6.1 n e e d §éng tĂ” n”y Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng ra sao cßn phĂŽ thuĂ©c v”o danh tĂ” ŸÞng Âź »ng sau nĂŁ l” Âź Ă©ng vËt hay bÊt Âź Ă©ng vËt. - khi chñ ng Ă· l” Âź Ă©ng vËt (living thing) Subject as a living thing + need + to + verb (cÇn ph¶i l”m g ×) VÝ dĂŽ: I need to clean my house. John and his brother need to paint the house. My friend needs to learn Spanish. He will need to drive alone tonight. -Tuy nhiÂȘn khi chñ ng Ă· l” mĂ©t bÊt Âź Ă©ng vËt (unliving thing) th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau need sÏ Âź ĂŠi khžc. Subject as unliving thing + need + [Verb + ing] to be + P2 VÝ dĂŽ: The grass needs to be cut. HoÆc The grass needs cutting. The television needs repairing. HoÆc The television need to be repaired. The composition needs rewriting. HoÆc The composition needs to be rewritten. L u Ăœ: need = to be in need of + noun to be in need of + noun cĂŁ thÓ thay thÕ cho c¶ 2 c«ng thĂžc trÂȘn. VÝ dĂŽ: Jill is in need of money = Jill needs money. The roof is in need of repair = The roof needs to be repaired.
  • 43. The organization was in need of volunteers = The organization needed volunteers. 6.2 Dare - Dare kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng nhiÒu Ă« khÂŒng ¼Þnh. NĂŁ chØ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng Ă« phñ ¼Þnh v” nghi vÊn. §éng tĂ” sau nĂŁ theo lĂœ thuyÕt l” cĂŁ to nhng trÂȘn thĂčc tÕ thĂȘng bĂĄ to. NĂŁ cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng vĂ­i trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to do hoÆc dĂŻng trĂčc tiÕp. He doesn’t dare (to) say anything = He dares not (to) say anything. Does he dare (to) say anything = Dares he (to) say anything. - Dare kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng Ă« thÓ khÂŒng ¼Þnh trĂ” tr ĂȘng hĂźp - I dare say mang 2 nghÜa: - T«i cho l”. VÝ dĂŽ: I dare say there will be a restaurant car at the end of the train. - T«i c«ng nhËn l”. VÝ dĂŽ: I dare say you are right. T«i thĂ”a nhËn l” anh Âź Ăłng. - How dare (dared) + subject ... (sao džm). VÝ dĂŽ: How dare you open my letter? Sao cËu džm bĂŁc th cña t«i ra thÕ ? - Dare cßn Âź Ăźc dĂŻng nh 1 ngoÂči Âź Ă©ng tĂ” mang nghÜa džm, thžch theo mÉu c ©u sau: To dare smb to do smth (thžch ai l”m g ×) They dare the boy to swim across the river in the cold weather. 7. Cžch dĂŻn g Âź Ă© n g tĂ” to b e + infinitive BE + INFINITIVE - NĂŁ Âź Ăźc dĂŻng ¼Ó truyÒn Âź Âčt nh Ă·ng mÖnh lÖnh hoÆc nh Ă·ng chØ dÉn ttĂ” ng ĂȘi thĂž nhÊt qua ngĂȘi thĂž 2 tĂ­i ngĂȘi thĂž 3. VÝ dĂŽ: No one is to leave this building without the permission of the police. (kh«ng ai Âź Ăźc phÐp rĂȘi to” nh” n”y m” kh«ng Âź Ăźc phÐp cña c¶nh sžt). He is to stay here until we return. (nĂŁ ph¶i Ă« lÂči Âź © y cho tĂ­i khi bĂ€n tao quay lÂči). - DĂŻng vĂ­i mÖnh ¼Ò if mang tÝnh bŸt buĂ©c hoÆc mÖnh lÖnh. VÝ dĂŽ: Something must be done quickly if extinct birds are to be saved
  • 44. He said if he fall asleep at the wheel, we were to wake him up. - ¼Ó truyÒn Âź Âčt mĂ©t dĂč ¼Þnh. VÝ dĂŽ: She is to be married next month. (c« Êy sÏ cĂ­i v”o thžng tĂ­i) The expedition is to start in a week’s time. CÊu trĂłc n”y rÊt th«ng dĂŽng trong bžo chÝ v” nÕu nĂŁ l” tĂča ¼Ò bžo th × ng ĂȘi ta bĂĄ be Âź i ¼Ó tiÕt kiÖm chç. VÝ dĂŽ: The Prime Minister is to make a statement tomorrow. = The Prime Minister to make a statement tomorrow. - Was/ were + infinitive §Ó diÔn Âź Âčt 1 Ăœ tĂ«ng vÒ sĂš mÖnh. VÝ dĂŽ: They said good bye without knowing that they were never to meet again. (hĂ€ chia tay nhau m” kh«ng biÕt r»ng sÏ chÂŒng bao giĂȘ hĂ€ gÆp lÂči nhau) - To be about to + verb = near future = to be in the point of Ving. 8. C©u h ĂĄi 8.1 C © u h ĂĄi y e s v ” n o SĂ« dÜ gĂ€i l” nh vËy v × trong c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi cĂŁ thÓ dĂŻng yes hoÆc no Ă« ¼Çu c ©u. NÂȘn nhĂ­ r»ng: Yes + positive verb No + negative verb. Kh«ng Âź Ăźc nhÇm lÉn dÂčng c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi tiÕng viÖt. auxiliary be + subject + verb ... do, does, did Is Mary going to school today? Was Mary sick yesterday? Have you seen this movie before? Will the committee decide on the proposal today? Do you want to use the telephone? Does George like peanut butter? Did you go to class yesterday?
  • 45. 8. 2 C © u h ĂĄi t h«n g bžo L” loÂči c ©u hĂĄi m” trong c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi ngo”i yes hoÆc no ra cßn ph¶i thÂȘm mĂ©t sĂš cžc th«ng tin khžc. Cžc c ©u hĂĄi n”y dĂŻng vĂ­i mĂ©t sĂš cžc Âź Âči tĂ” nghi vÊn. 8.2.1 who v” what l”m chñ ng Ă·. Who + verb + (complement) + (modifier) what Who opened the door? (someone opened the door) What happened last night? (something happened last night.) Ch Ăł Ăœ: Kh«ng Âź Ăłng khi nĂŁi : Who did open the door? What did happen last night? 8.2.2 Whom v” what l” t ©n ng Ă· cña c©u hĂĄi whom auxiliary + + subject + verb + ( modifier) what do, does, did Ch Ăł Ăœ: MÆc dĂŻ trong všn nĂŁi, nhiÒu ngĂȘi sö dĂŽng who thay cho whom trong loÂči c ©u hĂĄi n”y nhng tuyÖt Âź Ăši kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng nh vËy trong všn viÕt (lçi c ÂŹ b¶n) VÝ dĂŽ: Whom does Ahmad know from Venezuela? ( Ahmad know someone from Venezuela) What did George buy at the store? ( George bought something at the store) 8.2.3 C©u hĂĄi d”nh cho cžc bĂŠ ng Ă· (when, where, wh y, how) when where why how When did John move to Jacksonville? Where does Mohamad live ? Why did George leave so early? Auxiliary + be + subject + verb + (complement) + (modifier) do, does, did
  • 46. How did Maria get to school today? Where has Henry gone? When will Bertha go back to Mexico? 8. 3 C © u h ĂĄi gižn ti Õ p (e m b e d d e d q u e s tion s) L” loÂči c ©u hĂĄi cĂŁ cžc ¼Æc Âź iÓm sau: - C©u cĂŁ 2 th”nh phÇn nĂši vĂ­i nhau b»ng 1 Âź Âči tĂ” nghi vÊn. - Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò 2 ph¶i ŸÞng xu«i sau chñ ng Ă· kh«ng Âź Ăźc cÊu tÂčo c ©u hĂĄi Ă« th”nh phÇn thĂž 2. - Âź Âči tĂ” nghi vÊn kh«ng chØ bao gĂ„m 1 tĂ” m” nhiÒu khi cĂŁ thÓ l” 2 hoÆc 3 tĂ” chÂŒng hÂčn: whose + noun, how many, how much, how long, how often, what time, v” what kind. Subject + verb ( phrase) + question word + subject + verb VÝ dĂŽ: C©u hĂĄi : Where will the meeting take place? C©u hĂĄi gižn tiÕp: We haven’t ascertained where the meeting will take place. Q word subject verb phrase C©u hĂĄi: Why did the plane land at the wrong airport? C©u hĂĄi gižn tiÕp : The authorities cannot figure out why the plane landed at the wrong airport. Q word subject phrase auxiliary + subject + verb + question word + subject + verb Do you know where he went? Could you tell me what time it is? M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ: The professor didn’t know how many students would be in her afternoon class. I have no idea how long the interview will take. Do they know how often the bus runs at night? Can you tell me how far the museum is from the college? I’ll tell you what kind of ice cream tastes best. The teacher asked us whose book was on his desk.
  • 47. 8. 4 C © u h ĂĄi cĂŁ Âź u«i Khi sö dĂŽng loÂči c ©u hĂĄi n”y nÂȘn nhĂ­ r»ng nĂŁ kh«ng nh»m mĂŽc ¼Ých Âź ÂȘ hĂĄi m” nh»m ¼Ó khÂŒng ¼Þnh lÂči Ăœ kiÕn cña b¶n th ©n m ×nh Âź · biÕt. - C©u chia l”m 2 th”nh phÇn tžch biÖt nhau bĂ«i dÊu phÈy. - NÕu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« phÇn chÝnh Ă« thÓ khÂŒng ¼Þnh th × Ă« phÇn Âź u«i l” phñ ¼Þnh v” ngĂźc lÂči. - §éng tĂ” to be Âź Ăźc dĂŻng trĂčc tiÕp, cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” thĂȘng dĂŻng trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to do, cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thĂȘi kÐp: future, perfect, progressive dĂŻng vĂ­i chÝnh trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cña thĂȘi Âź ĂŁ. - Cžc th”nh ng Ă· there is, there are v” it is dĂŻng lÂči Ă« phÇn Âź u«i. - §éng tĂ” to have trong tiÕng Anh cña ngĂȘi MĂŒ l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” thĂȘng do Âź ĂŁ nĂŁ sÏ dĂŻng vĂ­i trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to do. VÝ dĂŽ: There are only twenty-eight days in February, aren’t there? It’s raining now, isn’t it? It isn’t raining now, is it? The boys don’t have class tomorrow, do they? You and I talked with the professor yesterday, didn’t we? You won’t be leaving for another hour, will you? Jill and Joe have been to Mexico, haven’t they? You have two children, don’t you? (Trong tiÕng Anh, th × sÏ dĂŻng haven’t you?) L u Ăœ: Trong cžc b”i thi TOEFL nÕu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” chÝnh l” have th × Âź »ng sau ph¶i dĂŻng trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” do. VÝ dĂŽ: She has an exam tomorrow, doesn’t she? 9. LĂši n ĂŁi p hĂŽ hoÂč khÂŒng ¼Þnh v ” p h ñ ¼Þnh. 9.1 L Ăši nĂŁi p h ĂŽ h oÂč k h ÂŒ n g Âź Þ n h. - DĂŻng ¼Ó phĂŽ hoÂč lÂči Ăœ khÂŒng ¼Þnh cña mĂ©t ng ĂȘi khžc tÂŹ ng Âź ÂŹ ng vĂ­i c ©u tiÕng viÖt “ cĂČng thÕ ” v” ngĂȘi ta sÏ dĂŻng so v” too trong cÊu trĂłc n”y. - §éng tĂ” to be Âź Ăźc phÐp dĂŻng trĂčc tiÕp, cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” thĂȘng dĂŻng vĂ­i trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to do, cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thĂȘi kÐp (future, perfect, progressive) dĂŻng vĂ­i chÝnh Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cña nĂŁ. - Khi be Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng trong mÖnh ¼Ò chÝnh th × thĂȘi cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” be sö dĂŽng trong c ©u phĂŽ hoÂč cĂČng ph¶i cĂŻng thĂȘi vĂ­i be Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò chÝnh. Subject + verb(be) + too Affirmative statement (be) + and +
  • 48. So + verb(be) + subject VÝ dĂŽ: I am happy, and you are too. I am happy, and so are you. - Khi mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thÓ kÐp (auxilary + verb), vÝ dĂŽ, will go, should do, has done, have written, must examine, vv... xuÊt hiÖn trong mÖnh ¼Ò chÝnh th × trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cña mÖnh ¼Ò chÝnh Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng Ă« dÂčng khÂŒng ¼Þnh, v” chñ ng Ă· v” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” ph¶i ho” hĂźp. Subject + auxiliary only + too Affirmative statement + and + ( Ÿéng tĂ” Ă« thÓ kÐp) So + auxiliary only + subject VÝ dĂŽ: They will work in the lab tomorrow, and you will too. They will work in the lab tomorrow, and so will you. Subject + d o, does, or did + too. Affirmative statement + and + ( Ÿéng tĂ” Âź ÂŹ n trĂ” be) So + do, does, or did + subject VÝ dĂŽ: Jane goes to that school, and my sister does too. Jane goes to that school, and so does my sister. John went to the mountains on his vacation, and we did too. John went to the mountains on his vacation, and so did we. I will be in New Mexico in August, and they will too. I will be in New Mexico in August, and so will they. He has seen her plays, and the girls have too. He has seen her plays, and so have the girls. We are going to the movies tonight, and Suzy is too. We are going to the movies tonight, and so is Suzy. She will wear a costume to the party, and we will too. She will wear a costume to the party, and so will we.
  • 49. 9. 2 L Ăši nĂŁi p h ĂŽ h oÂč p h ñ Âź Þ n h - DĂŻng ¼Ó phĂŽ hoÂč lÂči Ăœ phñ ¼Þnh cña ngĂȘi khžc, tÂŹ ng Ăžng vĂ­i c ©u tiÕng viÖt “ cĂČng kh«ng”. - CÊu trĂłc dĂŻng cho loÂči c ©u n”y l” either v” neither. NÂȘn nhĂ­ r»ng: Not ... either / Neither ... positive verb. Cžc trĂȘng hĂźp dĂŻng giĂšng hÖt c«ng thĂžc khÂŒng ¼Þnh. Subject + negative auxiliary or be + either . Negative statement + and + Neither + positive auxiliary or be + subject. VÝ dĂŽ: I didn’t see Mary this morning. John didn’t see Mary this morning. I didn’t see Mary this morning, and John didn’t either. I didn’t see Mary this morning, and neither did John. She won’t be going to the conference. Her colleagues won’t be going to the conference. She won’t be going to the conference, and her colleagues won’t either. She won’t be going to the conference, and neither will her colleagues. John hasn’t seen the new movie yet. I haven’t seen the new movie yet. John hasn’t seen the new movie yet, and I haven’t ether. John hasn’t seen the new movie yet, and neither have I. 10. C©u p h ñ ¼Þnh §Ó th”nh lËp c ©u phñ ¼Þnh ngĂȘi ta ¼Æt not v”o sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be, trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to do cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” thĂȘng, v” cžc trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« thĂȘi kÐp. - §Æt any Âź »ng trĂ­c danh tĂ” ¼Ó nhÊn mÂčnh cho phñ ¼Þnh. - Trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp ¼Ó nhÊn mÂčnh cho danh tĂ” Âź »ng sau bÞ phñ ¼Þnh, ng ĂȘi ta ¼Ó Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« nguyÂȘn thÓ v” ¼Æt no trĂ­c danh tĂ”. ( no = not at all). Nagative + nagative = Positive VÝ dĂŽ: It’s really unbelievable that he has no money. Nagative + comparative = Superlative
  • 50. VÝ dĂŽ: Professor Baker couldn’t be more helpful = Pr. Baker was the most helpful. We couldn’t have gone to the beach on a better day. TĂžc l”: Today is the best day to go to the beach. Nagative ..., much less + noun. (kh«ng m” lÂči c”ng kh«ng) VÝ dĂŽ: He didn’t like to read novels, much less text books. It’s really unbelievable how he could have survived, after such a free fall, much less live to tell about it on TV. MĂ©t sĂš phĂŁ tĂ” trong tiÕng Anh mang nghÜa phñ ¼Þnh, khi Âź · dĂŻng nĂŁ trong c ©u tuyÖt Âź Ăši kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng phñ ¼Þnh cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” n Ă·a. VÝ dĂŽ: Hardly Scarcely HÇu nh kh«ng ( Almost no) Barely Hardly ever Rarely HÇu nh kh«ng bao giĂȘ ( almost never). Seldom C«ng thĂžc dĂŻng vĂ­i cžc phĂŁ tĂ” trÂȘn. Subject + nagative + adverb + positive verb Lu Ăœ: Barely v” scarcely Âź «i khi mang nghÜa vĂ”a Âź ñ, vĂ”a soÂčn (just enough). Ph¶i cšn cĂž theo ng Ă· c¶nh cña c ©u hoÆc cžc c ©u tr¶ lĂȘi d Ă­i phÇn nghe ¼Ó t × m ra nghÜa Âź Ăłng. VÝ dĂŽ: He scarcely has money for the tuition fee and not any coins left. (NĂŁ vĂ”a Âź ñ tiÒn ¼Ó tr¶ hĂ€c phÝ v” kh«ng cßn xu n”o c¶.) 11. MÖnh lÖnh thĂžc Chia l”m 2 loÂči trĂčc tiÕp v” gižn tiÕp.
  • 51. 1 1. 1 M Ö n h lÖn h t h Ăžc tr Ăčc ti Õ p. MÖnh lÖnh thĂžc trĂčc tiÕp l” c ©u m” mĂ©t ngĂȘi ra lÖnh cho mĂ©t ngĂȘi khžc l”m viÖc g × Âź ĂŁ. NĂŁ cĂŁ thÓ cĂŁ please Âź i trĂ­c. Chñ ng Ă· Âź Ăźc hiÓu l” you. Sö dĂŽng dÂčng Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” (NguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to). VÝ dĂŽ: Close the door. Open the window. Leave the room. Pay your rent. Please turn off the light. Be quiet. DÂčng mÖnh lÖnh thĂžc phñ ¼Þnh Âź Ăźc th”nh lËp nhĂȘ cĂ©ng thÂȘm don’t trĂ­c Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. Don’t close the door. Please don’t turn off the light. Don’t open the window, please. ( Please cĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng ¼Çu hoÆc cuĂši c ©u mÖnh lÖnh thĂžc l”m cho c ©u trĂ« nÂȘn lÞch sĂč h ÂŹn). 1 1. 2 M Ö n h lÖn h t h Ăžc gižn ti Õ p. ThĂȘng dĂŻng vĂ­i 4 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau: to order to ask to tell to say VÝ dĂŽ: John told Mary to close the door. Jack asked Jill to turn off the light. The teacher told Christopher to open the window. Please tell Jaime to leave the room. John ordered Bill to close his book. The policeman ordered the suspect to be quiet. Lu Ăœ: §u«i cña Let’s ...., shall we. VÝ dĂŽ: Let’s go out for lunch, shall we? Khžc vĂ­i let us trong c ©u mÖnh lÖnh thĂžc. VÝ dĂŽ: Let’s go now (chĂłng ta Âź i th«i) khžc vĂ­i Let us go, please. ( xin h·y ¼Ó cho chĂłng t«i Âź i) to do something. not to do somethingsmb
  • 52. 12. §éng tĂ” khiÕ m khuy Õt. SĂ« dÜ gĂ€i l” nh vËy v × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” n”y mang nh Ă·ng ¼Æc tÝnh nh sau: - Kh«ng cĂŁ tiÓu tĂ” to Âź »ng trĂ­c. - §éng tĂ” n”o Âź i sau nĂŁ cĂČng ph¶i bĂĄ to. - Kh«ng bao giĂȘ 2 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khiÕm khuyÕt Âź i cĂŻng vĂ­i nhau, nÕu cĂŁ th × bŸt buĂ©c Âź Ă©ng tĂ” thĂž 2 ph¶i chuyÓn sang mĂ©t dÂčng khžc. VÝ dĂŽ: Will have to must Will be able to can Will be allowed to may §éng tĂ” khiÕm khuyÕt Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng vĂ­i cžc chĂžc nšng sau: 1 2. 1 Di Ôn Âź Âč t t h ĂȘi t ÂŹ n g lai. 12.2 Di Ôn Âź Âč t c © u Âź i Ò u ki Ön. 12.2.1 §iÒu kiÖn cĂŁ thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči. Will/shall If + Subject + simple present + subject + + [verb in simple form] can/ may VÝ dĂŽ: If I have the money, I will buy a new car. If you try more, you will improve your English. We will have plenty of time to finish the project before dinner if it is only ten o’clock now. If + subject + simple present tense + subject + ... + simple present tense MÉu c ©u n”y cßn Âź Ăźc dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn t¶ mĂ©t thĂŁi quen. VÝ dĂŽ: If the doctor has morning office hours, he visits his patients in the hospital in the afternoon (kh«ng cĂŁ Âź Ă©ng tĂ” khuyÕt thiÕu.) John usually walks to school if he has enough time.
  • 53. If + Subject + simple present tense ... + command form* ... * NÂȘn nhĂ­ r»ng mÖnh lÖnh thĂžc Ă« dÂčng Âź ÂŹ n gi¶n cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. ( simple form) MÉu c ©u trÂȘn cĂŁ nghÜa l” nhĂȘ ai, ra lÖnh cho ai l”m g ×. VÝ dĂŽ: If you go to the Post Office, please mail this letter for me. Please call me if you hear from Jane. 12.2.2 §iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči. Would/should If + Subject + simple past + subject + + verb in simple form could/ might VÝ dĂŽ: If I had enough money now, I would buy this house ( but now I don’t have enough money.) If I had the time, I would go to the beach with you this weekend. (but I don’t have the time.) ( I’m not going to the beach with you.) He would tell you about it if he were here. ( he won’t tell you about it.) ( He is not here). If he didn’t speak so quickly, you could understand him. (He speaks very quickly.) (You can’t understand him.) Lu Ăœ: §éng tĂ” to be sau if Ă« mÉu c ©u n”y ph¶i chia l”m were Ă« tÊt c¶ cžc ng«i. I... they were. VÝ dĂŽ: If I were you, I wouldn’t do such a thing. (but I’m not you.) 12.2.3 §iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi quž khĂž. Would/should If + Subject + past perfect + subject + + have + P2 could / might
  • 54. VÝ dĂŽ: If we hadn’t lost the way we could have been here in time. (but in fact we lost the way, so we were late.) If we had known that you were there, we would have written you a letter. (We didn’t know that you were there.) ( we didn’t write you a letter.) She would have sold the house if she had found the right buyer. (She didn’t sell the house.) (She didn’t find the right buyer.) If we hadn’t lost the way, we would have arrived sooner. (We lost our way.) (we didn’t arrive early.) C©u Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng ph¶i lĂłc n”o cĂČng tu ©n theo Âź Ăłng c«ng thĂžc trÂȘn, trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp 1 vÕ cña c ©u Âź iÒu kiÖn Ă« quž khĂž cßn mĂ©t vÕ lÂči Ă« hiÖn tÂči do thĂȘi gian cña tĂ”ng mÖnh ¼Ò quy ¼Þnh. VÝ dĂŽ: If she had caught the flight she would be here by now. Lu Ăœ: Trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp Ă« c ©u Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc Ă« thĂȘi quž khĂž, ngĂȘi ta bĂĄ if Âź i v” Âź ¶o had lÂȘn ¼Çu c ©u nhng Ăœ nghÜa vÉn gi Ă· nguyÂȘn. Had + subject + [verb in past participle ]... VÝ dĂŽ: Had we known you were there, we would have written you a letter. Had she found the right buyer, she would have sold the house. Hadn’t we lost the way, we would have arrived sooner. 12.2.4 Cžc cžch dĂŻng ¼Æc biÖt cña Will, would v” sould trong cžc mÖnh ¼Ò if ‱ Th«ng thĂȘng nh Ă·ng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” n”y kh«ng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng Âź »ng sau if nhng nÕu Âź Ăźc dĂŻng nĂŁ sÏ mang Ăœ nghÜa sau: If you will /would. ThĂȘng Âź Ăźc dĂŻng trong cžc yÂȘu cÇu lÞch sĂč ( Would lÞch sĂč h ÂŹn) VÝ dĂŽ: If you would wait a moment, I will see if Mr John is here. (NÕu c« vui lßng chĂȘ mĂ©t chĂłt, t«i sÏ xem liÖu «ng John cĂŁ Ă« Âź © y kh«ng.) I would be very grateful if you will/ would make an arrangement for me. If you could + verb in simple form.
  • 55. NÕu «ng vui lßng - Ngßi nĂŁi cho r»ng ngĂȘi kia sÏ Âź Ă„ng Ăœ nh mĂ©t lÏ tÊt nhiÂȘn VÝ dĂŽ: If you could fill in this form. If you could open your books. If + subject + will / would. NÕu ... chÞu - DiÔn Âź Âčt Ăœ tĂč nguyÖn VÝ dĂŽ: If he will (would) listen to me, I can help him. NÕu nĂŁ chÞu nghe theo lĂȘi t«i th × t«i cĂŁ thÓ giĂłp nĂŁ. If + subject + will. DiÔn t¶ sĂč ngoan cĂš. VÝ dĂŽ: If you will learn English this way, a failure for TOFEL test is sure awaiting you. NÕu cËu m” cĂž hĂ€c tiÕng Anh theo cžch n”y th × tr Ăźt kĂș thi TOFEL chŸc chŸn Âź ang chĂȘ Âź ĂŁn cËu. If + subject +should. DiÔn Âź Âčt mĂ©t h”nh Âź Ă©ng dĂŻ rÊt cĂŁ thÓ Âź Ăźc song kh¶ nšng rÊt Ýt v” khi nĂŁi ngĂȘi nĂŁi kh«ng tin l” sĂč viÖc lÂči cĂŁ thÓ x¶y ra. VÝ dĂŽ: If you shouldn’t know how to use this TV set, please call me up this number. NÕu anh kh«ng biÕt cžch sö dĂŽng chiÕc tivi n”y, h·y gĂ€i Âź iÖn cho t«i sĂš m žy n”y. (NĂŁi vËy nhng ngĂȘi nĂŁi kh«ng cho r»ng l” anh ta lÂči kh«ng biÕt sö dĂŽng chiÕc tivi Âź ĂŁ.) If you should have any difficulties while doing these exercises, please feel free to ask me. (NgĂȘi thÇy kh«ng cho r»ng cËu hĂ€c sinh lÂči kh«ng l”m Âź Ăźc nh Ă·ng b”i tËp Âź ĂŁ - v × chĂłng rÊt dÔ hoÆc cËu hĂ€c trß rÊt th«ng minh) - Trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp ngĂȘi ta bĂĄ if Âź i v” Âź ¶o should lÂȘn ¼Çu c ©u m” ng Ă· nghÜa kh«ng thay Âź ĂŠi. VÝ dĂŽ:
  • 56. Should you have any difficulties while doing these exercises, please feel free to ask me. Should it be cloudy and gray, the groundhog will supposedly wander around for food - a sign that spring is near. NÕu trĂȘi cĂŁ nhiÒu m © y v” bÇu trĂȘi xžm xÞt th × ngĂȘi ta cho l” con sĂŁc ¼Êt sÏ Âź i lang thang kiÕm šn - Âź ĂŁ l” dÊu hiÖu cña mĂŻa Xu ©n Âź ang tĂ­i gÇn. ThĂčc ra, khi sö dĂŽng cÊu trĂłc n”y th × tžc gi¶ cho r»ng khi con sĂŁc ¼Êt chui ra th × rÊt hiÕm khi trĂȘi lÂči cĂŁ nhiÒu m © y v” bÇu trĂȘi lÂči xžm lÂči - cĂŁ thÓ l” do kÕt qu¶ thĂšng kÂȘ. 13. Cžch sö dĂŽn g th”nh n g Ă· a s if, a s thou gh. (CĂŁ nghÜa l” : dĂȘng nh l”, nh thÓ l”) - MÖnh ¼Ò Âź »ng sau 2 th”nh ng Ă· n”y thĂȘng hay Ă« dÂčng Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc v” chia l”m 2 thĂȘi: 1 3. 1 Th ĂȘi hi Ö n tÂči NÕu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò trĂ­c chia Ă« simple present th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò sau ph¶i chia Ă« simple past, Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be sÏ ph¶i chia Ă« l” were Ă« tÊt c¶ cžc ng«i. as if Subject + verb (simple present) + + subject + verb (simple past) as though VÝ dĂŽ: The old lady dresses as if it were winter even in the summer. HiÖn tÂči quž khĂž (It is not winter.) Angelique walks as though she studied modelling. HiÖn tÂči quž khĂž (She didn’t study modelling) He acts as though he were rich. HiÖn tÂči quž khĂž (He is not rich) 1 3. 2 Th ĂȘi q už k h Ăž. NÕu Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò trĂ­c chia Ă« simple past th × Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò 2 ph¶i chia Ă« past perfect. Subject + verb (simple past) + + subject + verb (past perfect) as if as though
  • 57. VÝ dĂŽ: Betty talked about the contest as if she had won the grand prize. Past simple past perfect (She didn’t win the grand prize.) Jeff looked as if he had seen a ghost. Past simple past perfect (She didn’t see a ghost.) He looked as though he had run ten miles. Past simple past perfect (He didn’t run ten miles.) ‱ C¶ 2 dÂčng chia Âź ĂŁ sau as if ¼Òu diÔn Âź Âčt Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź - Ăźc. L u Ăœ: Trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp nÕu Âź iÒu kiÖn l” cĂŁ thËt th × 2 c«ng thĂžc trÂȘn kh«ng Âź Ăźc tu ©n theo. §éng tĂ” lÂči trĂ« vÒ dÂčng b ×nh thĂȘng theo diÔn biÕn cña c ©u. VÝ dĂŽ: He looks as if he has finish the test. 14. Cžch sö dĂŽn g Âź Ă© n g tĂ” To ho p e v ” to wish. Hai Âź Ă©ng tĂ” n”y tuy Âź Ă„ng nghÜa nhng khžc nhau vÒ mÆt ng Ă· phžp. + §»ng sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to hope l” mĂ©t c ©u diÔn biÕn b ×nh thĂȘng. VÝ dĂŽ: I hope that they will come. ( I don’t know if they are coming.) ( T«i hy vĂ€ng l” hĂ€ sÏ tĂ­i.) We hope that they came yesterday. ( We don’t know if they came.) + Nhng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to wish lÂči ¼ßi hĂĄi Âź »ng sau nĂŁ ph¶i l” mĂ©t Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc. §iÒu kiÖn n”y chia l”m 3 thĂȘi. 1 4. 1 Th ĂȘi t ÂŹ n g lai. §éng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò sau sÏ ph¶i l” Would / could + verb hoÆc were + Ving. Could + verb Subject + wish + (that) + Subject* + would + verb + ... were + Ving Subject* : cĂŁ thÓ l” cĂŻng hoÆc khžc chñ ng Ă· vĂ­i chñ ng Ă· trong mÖnh ¼Ò chÝnh. VÝ dĂŽ:
  • 58. We wish that you could come to the party tonight. (You can’t come.) I wish that you would stop saying that. (You probably won’t stop.) She wish that she were coming with us. ( She is not coming with us.) 1 4. 2 Th ĂȘi hi Ö n tÂči §éng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò 2 sÏ chia Ă« simple past. §éng tĂ” to be ph¶i chia l”m were Ă« tÊt c¶ cžc ng«i. Subject + wish + (that) + Subject* + verb in simple past ... VÝ dĂŽ: I wish that I had enough time to finish my homework. ( I don’t have enough time.) We wish that he were old enough to come with us. ( He is not old enough.) They wish that they didn’t have to go to class today. ( They have to go to class.) 1 4. 3 Th ĂȘi q už k h Ăž. §éng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò sau sÏ ph¶i chia Ă« Past perfect hoÆc Could have + P2 Past perfect Subject + wish + (that) + Subject + Could have + P2 VÝ dĂŽ: I wish that I had washed the clothes yesterday. ( I didn’t wash the clothes yesterday.) She wish that she could have been there. ( She couldn’t be there.) We wish that we had had more time last night. ( We didn’t have more time.) L u Ăœ: §éng tĂ” wish chØ cĂŁ thÓ ¶nh hĂ«ng ¼Õn mÖnh ¼Ò Âź »ng sau nĂŁ b»ng cžch buĂ©c mÖnh ¼Ò Âź ĂŁ ph¶i Ă« Âź iÒu kiÖn kh«ng thÓ thĂčc hiÖn Âź Ăźc. Nhng Âź iÒu kiÖn Âź ĂŁ Ă« thĂȘi n”o lÂči do thĂȘi gian cña mÖnh ¼Ò Âź ĂŁ quyÕt ¼Þnh kh«ng hÒ phĂŽ thuĂ©c v”o thĂȘi cña Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to wish. VÝ dĂŽ: He wished that he could come to the party next week. Quž khĂž §iÒu kiÖn Ă« tÂŹng lai TÂŹng lai PhĂŻ hĂźp vÒ thĂȘi The photographer wished that we stood closer together than we are standing now.
  • 59. Quž khĂž ÂźiÒu kiÖn Ă« hiÖn tÂči hiÖn tÂči PhĂŻ hĂźp vÒ thĂȘi - Ph¶i ph ©n biÖt vĂ­i to wish Ă« dÂčng c ©u n”y vĂ­i nghÜa Ă­c g ×, mong g × vĂ­i to wish trong mÉu c ©u sau: To wish somebody something VÝ dĂŽ: I wish you a happy birthday. 15. Cžch sö dĂŽn g th”nh n g Ă· us e d to v ” g et/b e us e d to 15.1 u s e d t o. Used to + [Verb in simple form]... ( ThĂȘng hay, Âź · tĂ”ng) ChØ mĂ©t thĂŁi quen, h”nh Âź Ă©ng thĂȘng xuyÂȘn x¶y ra lÆp Âź i lÆp lÂči trong quž khĂž. VÝ dĂŽ: When David was young, he used to swim once a day. ( ThĂŁi quen trong quž khĂž) Ch u y Ó n sa n g c © u n g hi v Ê n: Did + Subject + use to + Verb = Used + Subject + to + verb. VÝ dĂŽ: When David was young, did he use to swim once a day? used he to swim once a day? C © u p h ñ Âź Þ n h : Subject + didn’t + use to + Verb = Subject + used not to + verb. VÝ dĂŽ: When David was young, he didn’t use to swim once a day. he used not to swim once a day. (*)
  • 60. 1 5. 2 g e t / b e u s e d t o. BE / GET USED TO + VING ( trĂ« nÂȘn quen vĂ­i) (noun) Lu Ăœ: Trong c«ng thĂžc (*) cĂŁ thÓ thay used to = Would nhng dÔ nhÇm lÉn. 16. Cžch sö dĂŽn g th”nh n g Ă· Would rath er Would rather ... than = Prefer ... to (ThÝch ... h ÂŹn l”; th” ... h ÂŹn l”) − §»ng sau would rather ph¶i l” mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to (bare infinitive) nhng Âź »ng sau prefer ph¶i l” mĂ©t verb +ing. VÝ dĂŽ: John would rather drink Coca-Cola than orange juice. John prefer drinking Coca-Cola to drinking orange juice. L u Ăœ: − ViÖc sö dĂŽng th”nh ng Ă· n”y cßn tuĂș thuĂ©c v”o sĂš chñ ng Ă· v” nghÜa cña c ©u 1 6. 1 L oÂči c © u cĂŁ m Ă© t c hñ n g Ă· . Ă« loÂči c ©u n”y chØ dĂŻng Would rather (kh«ng cĂŁ than) v” chia l”m 2 thĂȘi : 1. Th ĂȘi hi Ö n tÂči. §éng tĂ” sau Would rather l” nguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to. NÕu muĂšn dĂŻng phñ ¼Þnh ¼Æt not trĂ­c Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to ( c«ng thĂžc 1) Subject + Would rather + (not) bare infinitive VÝ dĂŽ: Jim would rather go to class tomorrow Trong c ©u n”y ngĂȘi nĂŁi muĂšn nĂŁi Jim thÝch ¼Õn lĂ­p v”o ng”y mai (chĂž h«m nay Jim kh«ng muĂšn) 2. Th ĂȘi q už k h Ăž. Ă« thĂȘi quž khĂž sau would rather l” have + past participle (hay cßn gĂ€i l” ph ©n tĂ” 2 - P2) - C«ng thĂžc 2. Subject + would rather + have + (P2) (1) (2)
  • 61. VÝ dĂŽ: John would rather have gone to class yesterday than today ( John thÝch Âź i hĂ€c v”o ng”y h«m qua h ÂŹn ng”y h«m nay). 1 6. 2 L oÂči c © u cĂŁ 2 c hñ n g Ă· Ă« loÂči c ©u n”y th”nh ng Ă· Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng sÏ l” Would rather that (Ă­c g ×, mong g ×) v” chia l”m nh Ă·ng mÉu c ©u nh sau: 1. C © u gi¶ Âź Þ n h L” loÂči c ©u diÔn Âź Âčt Ăœ ngĂȘi thĂž nhÊt muĂšn ngĂȘi thĂž 2 l”m mĂ©t viÖc g × Âź ĂŁ, nhng l”m hay kh«ng cßn tuĂș thuĂ©c v”o v”o phÝa ngĂȘi thĂž 2. Do vËy cÊu trĂłc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” sau chñ ng Ă· 2 ph¶i l” nguyÂȘn thÓ bĂĄ to - C«ng thĂžc 1. Subject1 + Would rather that + Subject2 + bare infinitive VÝ dĂŽ: I would rather that Jones call me tomorrow ( T«i muĂšn Johnes gĂ€i Âź iÖn cho t«i v”o ng”y mai - Nhng Jones cĂŁ gĂ€i Âź iÖn cho ngĂȘi nĂŁi hay kh«ng cßn tuĂș v”o Jones). We would rather that he take this train. (§žp chuyÕn t”u Âź ĂŁ hay kh«ng cßn tuĂș v”o anh Êy - HĂ€ chØ muĂšn vËy). 2. §iÒu ki Ö n k h«n g t h Ăčc hi Ö n Âź Ăźc Ă« hi Ö n tÂči (n g hÜa cña c © u trži vĂ­i t h Ăčc t Õ). §éng tĂ” sau chñ ng Ă· 2 sÏ chia Ă« Simple past, Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be sÏ ph¶i Âź Ăźc chia th”nh Were Ă« tÊt c¶ cžc ng«i - C«ng thĂžc 2 Subject1 + would rather that + Subject2 + Simple past... VÝ dĂŽ: Henry would rather that his girlfriend worked in the same department as he does (In fact his girlfriend doesn’t work in the same department.) Jane would rather that it were winter now. (It is not winter now.) NhËn xÐt: - Trong cžc c ©u trÂȘn nghÜa cña vÕ thĂž 2 lu«n trži vĂ­i thĂčc tÕ Ă« thĂȘi Âź iÓm hiÖn tÂči. - NÕu muĂšn th”nh lËp thÓ phñ ¼Þnh dĂŻng (1) Did not + verb Were not + verb (2)
  • 62. 3. §iÒu ki Ö n k h«n g t h Ó t h Ăčc hi Ö n Âź Ăźc tr o n g q už k h Ăž ( N g hÜa cña c © u l” trži vĂ­i t h Ăčc t Õ.) Trong loÂči c ©u n”y Âź Ă©ng tĂ” Ă« mÖnh ¼Ò thĂž 2 sÏ ph¶i Âź Ăźc chia Ă« Past perfect - C«ng thĂžc 1. Subject1 + would rather that + Subject2 + Past perfect VÝ dĂŽ: Jim would rather that Jill had gone to class yesterday. (nhng trong thĂčc tÕ th × Jill Âź · kh«ng tĂ­i lĂ­p ng”y h«m qua v” ng ĂȘi nĂŁi chØ lÊy l”m tiÔc l” Jill Âź · kh«ng tĂ­i lĂ­p v”o ng”y h«m qua.) N h Ë n xÐt : TrÂȘn thĂčc tÕ nghÜa cña to wish v” would rather that (vĂ­i nghÜa Ă­c, mong muĂšn) trong trĂȘng hĂźp trÂȘn l” giĂšng nhau nhng Wish Âź Ăźc sö dĂŽng trong tiÕng Anh b ×nh d ©n (h”ng ng”y). Cßn Would rather that mang kÞch tÝnh nhiÒu h ÂŹn. 17. Cžch sö dĂŽn g Would Like Th”nh ng Ă· n”y dĂŻng ¼Ó mĂȘi mĂ€c ngĂȘi khžc mĂ©t cžch lÞch sĂč hoÆc diÔn Âź Âčt mong muĂšn cña m ×nh mĂ©t cžch nh· nhÆn sau Âź ĂŁ ph¶i l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ cĂŁ to (infinitive). Subject + would like + [to + verb] ... VÝ dĂŽ: Would you like to dance with me? I would like to visit Hongkong. We would like to order now, please. The president would like to be re-elected. They would like to study at the university. Would you like to see a movie tonight? L u Ăœ : - NÕu h”nh Âź Ă©ng Âź Ăźc xžc ¼Þnh cĂŽ thÓ vÒ mÆt thĂȘi gian hoÆc thĂȘi gian l” hiÖn tÂči th × dĂŻng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nguyÂȘn thÓ sau like. - Nhng nÕu thĂȘi gian l” kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh th × ph¶i dĂŻng Verb +ing. VÝ dĂŽ: Would you like a lemonade now? (thĂȘi gian l” hiÖn tÂči now) She likes watching TV every night. (thĂȘi gian l” kh«ng xžc ¼Þnh - chØ sĂ« thÝch hobby) HoÆc I would like eating a steak and salad. (1)
  • 63. 18. Cžch sö dĂŽn g c žc Âź Ă© n g tĂ” khiÕ m khuy Õt Âź Ó diÔn ÂźÂčt c žc trÂčng th ži Ă« hiÖn tÂči. 18.1 Co uld/ may/ mi g h t. Could/may/might + [Verb in simple form] CĂŁ thÓ /cĂŁ lÏ. ChØ mĂ©t kh¶ nšng cĂŁ thÓ x¶y ra Ă« hiÖn tÂči song ng ĂȘi nĂŁi kh«ng chŸc. C¶ 3 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” cĂŁ giž trÞ nh nhau. VÝ dĂŽ: It might rain tomorrow It will possibly rain tomorrow It may rain tomorrow = OR It could rain tomorrow Maybe it will rain tomorrow Ch Ăł Ăœ: Maybe l” sĂč kÕt hĂźp cña may v” be, nhng nĂŁ l” mĂ©t tĂ” v” kh«ng ph¶i l” trĂź Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. NĂŁ Âź Ă„ng nghÜa vĂ­i perhaps. MĂ©t s Ăš vÝ d ĂŽ v Ò Co uld, m ay, v ” m i g h t : The president said that there might be a strike next month. I don’t know what I’m doing tomorrow. I may go to the beach or I may stay home. (Lu Ăœ l” ngĂȘi Anh thĂȘng nĂŁi l” stay at home nhng ngĂȘi MĂŒ lÂči nĂŁi l” stay home.) It might be warmer tomorrow. I may not be able to go with you tonight. I don’t know where Jaime is. He could be at home. 1 8. 2 S h o uld Should + [Verb in simple form] NghÜa l” : - NÂȘn ( diÔn Âź Âčt mĂ©t lĂȘi khuyÂȘn, ¼Ò nghÞ hoÆc bŸt buĂ©c nhng kh«ng mÂčnh lŸm) - CĂŁ khi - dĂŻng ¼Ó diÔn Âź Âčt mong muĂšn Âź iÒu g × x¶y ra. VÝ dĂŽ: It should rain tomorrow ( I expect it to rain tomorrow) My check should arrive next week. ( I expect it to arrive next week). L u Ăœ: - Had better, ought to, be supposed to nĂŁi chung l” Âź Ă„ng nghÜa vĂ­i should vĂ­i Âź iÒu kiÖn l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be ph¶i chia Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči.
  • 64. - be supposed to ngo”i nghÜa tÂŹ ng Âź ÂŹ ng vĂ­i should cßn mang nghÜa quy ¼Þnh ph¶i, bŸt buĂ©c ph¶i. VÝ dĂŽ: We are supposed to have a math test this afternoon, but it was postponed because the Professor had to attend a science conference. ( Theo quy ¼Þnh l” ....) 1 8. 3 M u s t Must + [verb in simple form] NghÜa l” : - Ph¶i - bŸt buĂ©c rÊt mÂčnh (ngĂȘi bÞ bŸt buĂ©c kh«ng cĂŁ sĂč lĂča chĂ€n n”o khžc) VÝ dĂŽ: One must endorse a check before one cashes it. (ngĂȘi ta ph¶i kĂœ sau tÊm sÐc trĂ­c khi rĂłt tiÒn). George must call his insurance agent today. A pharmacist must keep a record of the prescriptions that are filled. An automobile must have gasoline to run. An attorney must pass an examination before practising law. This freezer must be kept at -200 . - HÂŒn l” - diÔn Âź Âčt mĂ©t sĂč suy luËn cĂŁ logic dĂča trÂȘn nh Ă·ng hiÖn t Ăźng cĂŁ thËt Ă« hiÖn tÂči. VÝ dĂŽ: John’s lights are out. He must be asleep. (We assume that John is asleep because the lights are out.) The grass is wet. It must be raining. (We assume that it is raining because the grass is wet.) ‱ Must Âź Ăźc thay thÕ b»ng have to trong nh Ă·ng trĂȘng hĂźp sau Âź © y - §Þng sau Will Ă« thĂȘi tÂŹ ng lai. VÝ dĂŽ: We will have to take a TOEFL test at the end of this year. - Had to thay cho must Ă« quž khĂž. VÝ dĂŽ: The teacher had to attend a science conference yesterday. ‱ Ă« thĂȘi hiÖn tÂči have to Âź Ăźc thay thÕ cho must khi:
  • 65. HĂĄi xem m ×nh cĂŁ bÞ buĂ©c ph¶i l”m Âź iÒu g × kh«ng hoÆc diÔn Âź Âčt sĂč bŸt buĂ©c do khžch quan mang lÂči ¼Ó l”m gi¶m nhÑ tÝnh bŸt buĂ©c cña must. VÝ dĂŽ: Q : Do I have to leave a deposit? A : No, you needn’t but you have to sign in this register, I’m sorry but that’s the rule. 19. Cžch sö dĂŽn g c žc Âź Ă© n g tĂ” khiÕ m khuy Õt Âź Ó diÕn ÂźÂčt c žc trÂčng th ži Ă« th ĂȘi q u ž khĂž. Could/ May/ might + have +P2 (cĂŁ lÏ Âź ·) ChØ mĂ©t kh¶ nšng Ă« quž khĂž song ngĂȘi nĂŁi kh«ng džm chŸc. VÝ dĂŽ: It might have rained last night, but I’m not sure. (CĂŁ lÏ Âź ÂȘ m qua trĂȘi m a) The cause of death could have been bacteria. (NguyÂȘn nh ©n cña cži chÕt cĂŁ lÏ l” do vi trĂŻng) John might have gone to the movies yesterday. (CĂŁ lÏ John Âź · tĂ­i rÂčp chiÕu bĂŁng ng”y h«m qua) Could + have +P2 (cĂŁ lÏ Âź · cĂŁ thÓ - nhng thĂčc tÕ th × kh«ng) VÝ dĂŽ: We could have solved this problem at that time (But we couldn’t in fact) (LÏ ra lĂłc Âź ĂŁ chĂłng t«i Âź · cĂŁ thÓ gi¶i quyÕt Âź Ăźc vÊn ¼Ò n”y.) SHOULD + HAVE + P2 (lÏ ra ph¶i, lÏ ra nÂȘn - nhng thĂčc tÕ th × kh«ng) Th”nh ng Ă· n”y tÂŹ ng Âź ÂŹ ng vĂ­i Was / were / Supposed to. MUST HAVE P2 - HÂŒn l” Âź · (ChØ sĂč suy luËn logic dĂča trÂȘn nh Ă·ng hiÖn t Ăźng cĂŁ thËt trong quž khĂž) VÝ dĂŽ: Paul did so well in his speech today that he could have rehearsed it many times this past week.
  • 66. (H«m nay Paul Âź · cĂŁ lĂȘi phžt biÓu rÊt hay, hÂŒn l” tuÇn qua nĂŁ Âź · diÔn tËp rÊt nhiÒu lÇn ). MIGHT HAVE BEEN VERB+ ING - cĂŁ lÏ lĂłc Êy Âź ang (ChØ sĂč suy luËn logic dĂča trÂȘn nh Ă·ng hiÖn t Ăźng cĂŁ thËt trong quž khĂž) VÝ dĂŽ: I didn’t hear the telephone ring, I might have been sleeping at that time. I didn’t watch that scene on television, I might have been paying attention to the argument. MUST HAVE BEEN VERB+ ING - chŸc hÂŒn lĂłc Êy Âź ang (ChØ sĂč suy luËn logic dĂča trÂȘn nh Ă·ng hiÖn t Ăźng cĂŁ thËt trong quž khĂž) VÝ dĂŽ: I didn’t hear you knock, I must have been sleeping at that time. I didn’t see him this morning, he must have been working in the office. 20. tÝnh tĂ” v ” p h ĂŁ tĂ” (adjectiv e a n d a d v erb). ‱ MĂ©t tÝnh tĂ” bao giĂȘ cĂČng bĂŠ nghÜa cho mĂ©t danh tĂ” v” chØ danh tĂ”. NĂŁ ŸÞng ngay trĂ­c danh tĂ” Âź ĂŁ. Trong tiÕng Anh chØ cĂŁ mĂ©t danh tĂ” duy nhÊt ŸÞng sau danh tĂ” m” nĂŁ bĂŠ nghÜa Âź ĂŁ l”: galore ( nhiÒu, phong phĂł, dĂ„i d”o). VÝ dĂŽ: There are errors galore in the final exam. - MĂ©t phĂŁ tĂ” bao giĂȘ cĂČng bĂŠ nghÜa cho: + MĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” - mĂ©t tÝnh tĂ” - v” mĂ©t phĂŁ tĂ” khžc. VÝ dĂŽ: He runs very fast. verb adv adv She is terribly beautiful. Adv adj - Adj + ly = adv nhng ph¶i cÈn thËn v × kh«ng ph¶i bÊt cĂž tĂ” n”o cĂŁ Âź u«i ly ¼Òu l” phĂŁ tĂ”. MĂ©t sĂš cžc tÝnh tĂ” cĂČng cĂŁ tËn cĂŻng l” ly. VÝ dĂŽ: Lovely, friendly, lonely.
  • 67. - MĂ©t sĂš cžc cĂŽm tĂ” mĂ« ¼Çu b»ng giĂ­i tĂ” ¼Ó chØ ¼Þa Âź iÓm, thĂȘi gian, phÂŹ ng tiÖn h”nh Âź Ă©ng, t ×nh huĂšng h”nh Âź Ă©ng cĂČng Âź Ăźc coi l” phĂŁ tĂ”. VÝ dĂŽ: in the office. - MĂ©t sĂš cžc phĂŁ tĂ” cĂŁ cÊu tÂčo ¼Æc biÖt nh soon, very, almost. - VÞ trÝ cžc phĂŁ tĂ” trong tiÕng Anh t ÂŹ ng Âź Ăši tho¶i m ži nhng cĂČng cĂŁ nh Ă·ng phĂžc tÂčp. CĂŁ mĂ©t sĂš quy luËt nh sau: + Cžc phĂŁ tĂ” bĂŠ ng Ă· sÏ thĂȘng xuyÂȘn ŸÞng Ă« cuĂši c ©u theo thĂž tĂč u tiÂȘn: ‱ chØ phÂŹ ng thĂžc h”nh Âź Ă©ng ( Âźu«i ly), ‱ chØ ¼Þa Âź iÓm (here, there, at school...), ‱ chØ thĂȘi gian, ‱ chØ phÂŹ ng tiÖn h”nh Âź Ă©ng, ‱ chØ t ×nh huĂšng h”nh Âź Ă©ng. + MĂ©t phĂŁ tĂ” kh«ng bao giĂȘ Âź Ăźc ŸÞng xen v”o gi Ă·a Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” t ©n ng Ă·. VÝ dĂŽ: I have terribly a headache. (c ©u sai v × phĂŁ tĂ” ŸÞng xen gi Ă·a Âź Ă©ng tĂ” v” t ©n ng Ă· ) + NÕu trong c ©u chØ cĂŁ phĂŁ tĂ” chØ thĂȘi gian th × nĂŁ thÓ ŸÞng lÂȘn ¼Çu c ©u. VÝ dĂŽ: In 1975 I graduated but I didn’t find a job. + Cžc phĂŁ tĂ” chØ tÇn sĂš (always, sometimes...) thĂȘng bao giĂȘ cĂČng ŸÞng trĂ­c Âź Ă©ng tĂ” chÝnh khi nĂŁ l” Âź Ă©ng tĂ” h”nh Âź Ă©ng, nh ng bao giĂȘ cĂČng ŸÞng sau Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be. VÝ dĂŽ: - They have often visited me recently. - He always comes in time. Nhng: The president is always in time. 21. §éng tĂ” n Ăši. §ã l” cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” trong b¶ng sau. become remain appear smell taste Cžc Âź Ă©ng tĂ” trÂȘn cĂŁ nh Ă·ng ¼Æc tÝnh sau: ‱ Kh«ng diÔn Âź Âčt h”nh Âź Ă©ng m” diÔn Âź Âčt b¶n chÊt cña sĂč vËt, sĂč viÖc, nh m”u sŸc, mĂŻi vÞ ... ‱ §»ng sau chĂłng ph¶i l” mĂ©t tÝnh tĂ” kh«ng Âź Ăźc l” mĂ©t phĂŁ tĂ”.
  • 68. Lu Ăœ: cžc cÆp Âź Ă©ng tĂ” appear to happen seem = to chance ( DĂȘng nh) - To appear cĂŁ thÓ thay thÕ cho to seem v” ngĂźc lÂči nhng kh«ng thÓ thay thÕ cho to happen v” to chance. - 3 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to be, to become, to remain cĂŁ nh Ă·ng trĂȘng hĂźp cĂŁ mĂ©t danh tĂ” hoÆc mĂ©t ng Ă· danh tĂ” theo sau, lĂłc Âź ĂŁ chĂłng mÊt Âź i chĂžc nšng Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nĂši. - 4 Âź Ă©ng tĂ” to feel, to look, to smell v” to taste trong mĂ©t sĂš trĂȘng hĂźp ¼ßi hĂĄi sau nĂŁ l” danh tĂ” l”m t ©n ng Ă· v” trĂ« th”nh mĂ©t ngoÂči Âź Ă©ng tĂ”. LĂłc n”y chĂłng mÊt Âź i chĂžc nšng cña mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” nĂši v” trĂ« th”nh mĂ©t Âź Ă©ng tĂ” diÔn Âź Âčt h”nh Âź Ă©ng v” cĂŁ quyÒn ¼ßi hĂĄi 1 phĂŁ tĂ” Âź i bĂŠ trĂź (chĂłng thay Âź ĂŠi vÒ mÆt ng Ă· nghÜa). - To feel = sĂȘ, nŸn, khžm xÐt. - to look at : nh ×n - to smeel : ngöi. - to taste : nÕm. 22. So s ž n h cña tÝnh tĂ” v ” d a n h tĂ” 22.1 S o sžn h b»n g. So sžnh b»ng chØ ra 2 thĂčc thÓ chÝnh xžc giĂšng nhau (b»ng nhau hoÆc nh nhau) v” ngĂźc lÂči nÕu cÊu trĂłc so sžnh Ă« dÂčng phñ ¼Þnh. CÊu trĂłc As ... as adj noun S + verb + as + + as + adv pronoun ‱ NÕu l” cÊu trĂłc phñ ¼Þnh as thĂž nhÊt cĂŁ thÓ thay b»ng so. VÝ dĂŽ: He is not so tall as his father. L u Ăœ : Ta cÇn ph¶i nhĂ­ r»ng Âź Âči tĂ” sau as lu«n Ă« dÂčng chñ ng Ă·. Peter is as tall as I. You are as old as she. M Ă© t s Ăš t hÝ d ĂŽ v Ò s o sžn h b»n g. My book is as interesting as your. TÝnh tĂ”